Ericsson | SPR1100 | Operating instructions | Ericsson SPR1100 Operating instructions

SPR1100 Stream Processor
Software Version 6.7.x (and later)
REFERENCE GUIDE
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
SPR1100 Stream Processor
ENGLISH (UK) - READ THIS FIRST!
ITALIANO - LEGGERE QUESTO AVVISO PER PRIMO!
If you do not understand the contents of this manual. DO NOT OPERATE
THIS EQUIPMENT. Also, translation into any EC official language of this
manual can be made available, at your cost.
Se non si capisce il contenuto del presente manuale. NON UTILIZZARE
L’APPARECCHIATURA.. È anche disponibile la versione italiana di questo
manuale, ma il costo è a carico dell’utente.
SVENSKA - LÄS DETTA FÖRST!
NEDERLANDS - LEES DIT EERST!
Om Ni inte förstår informationen i denna handbok. ARBETA DÅ INTE MED
DENNA UTRUSTNING. En översättning till detta språk av denna handbok
kan också anskaffas, på Er bekostnad.
Als u de inhoud van deze handleiding niet begrijpt. STEL DEZE
APPARATUUR DAN NIET IN WERKING. U kunt tevens, op eigen kosten,
een vertaling van deze handleiding krijgen.
PORTUGUÊS - LEIA O TEXTO ABAIXO ANTES DE MAIS NADA!
SUOMI - LUE ENNEN KÄYTTÖÄ!
Se não compreende o texto deste manual. NÃO UTILIZE O
EQUIPAMENTO. O utilizador poderá também obter uma tradução do
manual para o português à própria custa.
Jos et ymmärrä käsikirjan sisältöä. ÄLÄ KÄYTÄ LAITETTA. Käsikirja
voidaan myös suomentaa asiakkaan kustannuksella.
FRANÇAIS - AVANT TOUT, LISEZ CE QUI SUIT!
DANSK - LÆS DETTE FØRST!
Si vous ne comprenez pas les instructions contenues dans ce manuel. NE
FAITES PAS FONCTIONNER CET APPAREIL. En outre, nous pouvons
vous proposer, à vos frais, une version française de ce manuel.
Udstyret må ikke betjenes. MEDMINDRE DE TIL FULDE FORSTÅR
INDHOLDET AF DENNE HÅNDBOG. Vi kan også for Deres regning levere
en dansk oversættelse af denne håndbog.
DEUTSCH - LESEN SIE ZUERST DIESEN HINWEIS!
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ - ∆ΙΑΒΑΣΤΕ ΠΡΩΤΑ ΑΥΤΟ!
Sollte Ihnen der Inhalf dieses Handbuches nicht klar verständlich sein,
dann. BEDIENEN SIE DIESE GERÄTE NICHT! Eine Übersetzung des
Handbuches in diese Sprache ist gegen Berechnung lieferbar.
Αν δεν καταλάβετε το περιεχόμενο αυτού του βοηθήματος/εγχειριδίου. ΜΗΝ
ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΗΣΕΤΕ ΑΥΤΟΝ ΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ. Επίσης, αυτό το εγχειρίδιο
είναι διαθέσιμο σε μετάφραση σε αυτή τη γλώσσα και μπορείτε να το
αγοράσετε.
ESPAÑOL - LEA ESTE AVISO PRIMERO!
Si no entiende el contenido de este manual. NO OPERE ESTE EQUIPO.
Podemos asimismo suministrarle una traducción de este manual al (idioma)
previo pago de una cantidad adicional que deberá abonar usted mismo.
Copyright
© Copyright Ericsson AB 2013. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of the
copyright owner.
The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any error or damage of
any kind resulting from the use of this document.
ii
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction
This chapter identifies the equipment versions covered by this manual, describes
the purpose of the equipment in a typical system and lists the available options.
Chapter 2: Installing the Equipment
This chapter details the preparation and installation of the equipment including
important safety information. It also provides pin-out details for the external
connectors.
Chapter 3: Getting Started
This chapter provides a guide to powering up the unit and setting up the IP address.
Chapter 4: Front Panel Control
This chapter describes the front panel display menus and options and details any
operating procedures.
Chapter 5: Web GUI Configuration
This chapter provides the configuration of the unit using the Web Graphical User
Interface.
Chapter 6: Stream Processing and Networking
This chapter describes the principles and techniques used in the design of the
equipment to aid in understanding its operation and function.
Chapter 7: Options, Licensing and Upgrades
This chapter provides details of option cards that may be fitted to this equipment.
Chapter 8: Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
This chapter details routine maintenance tasks, servicing advice and information
regarding warranty and maintenance. It also lists error and error messages that may
occur and recommends the action to be taken.
Annex A: Glossary
Annex B: Technical Specification
Annex C: Audio Coding Standards
Annex D: Dolby Metadata Presets
Annex E: Alarms List
Annex F: Automatic Loudness Control (ALC)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
iii
Preliminary Pages
Introduction
This Reference Guide provides instructions and information for the installation,
operation of the SPR1100 Stream Processor.
This Reference Guide should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life of the
equipment. It is not intended that this Reference Guide will be amended by the issue
of individual pages. Any revision will be by a complete reissue. Further copies of this
Reference Guide can be ordered from the address listed in Customer Services. If
passing the equipment to a third party, also pass the relevant documentation.
Revision History
Issues of this Reference Guide are listed below:
Issue
Date
Software Version
Comments
A
May 2013
6.7.x
Initial release. Converted from CHM
Robohelp help file:
1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen A.
B
July 2013
6.7.x
Rename Reflex.
Trademarks
All best endeavors have been made to acknowledge registered trademarks and
trademarks used throughout this Reference Guide. Any notified omissions will be
rectified in the next issue of this Reference Guide. Some trademarks may be
registered in some jurisdictions but not in others.
Registered trademarks and trademarks used are acknowledged below and marked
with their respective symbols. However, they are not marked within the text of this
Reference Guide.
Registered Trademarks
Dolby®
Registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Dolby® Digital
Registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Ethernet®
Registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Trademarks
Reflex™
iv
Trademark of Ericsson Television.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preliminary Pages
Warnings, Cautions and Notes
Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
The manufacturer can not be held responsible for injuries or damage where
warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken lightly.
Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this product is
operated.
Follow Instructions
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
Retain Instructions
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
Warning!
Warnings give information which, if strictly observed, will prevent personal injury or
death, or damage to property or the environment. They are highlighted for
emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately preceding the point at
which the reader requires them.
Caution!
Cautions give information which, if strictly followed, will prevent damage to
equipment or other goods. They are highlighted for emphasis, as in this example,
and are placed immediately preceding the point at which the reader requires them.
Note:
Notes provide supplementary information. They are highlighted for
emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately after the relevant
text.
EMC Compliance
This equipment is certified to the EMC requirements detailed in Annex B, Technical
Specification. To maintain this certification, only use the leads supplied or if in doubt
contact Customer Services.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
v
Preliminary Pages
Contact Information
Support Services
Our primary objective is to provide first class customer care that is tailored to your
specific business and operational requirements. All levels are supported by one or
more service performance reviews to ensure the perfect partnership between
Ericsson and your business.
Warranty
All Ericsson products and systems are designed and built to the highest standards
and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty.
Levels of Continuing Ericsson Service Support
For standalone equipment, then Ericsson BASIC Essential support is the value for
money choice for you. BASIC provides you with year-by-year Service long after the
warranty has expired.
For systems support you can choose either Gold Business Critical support or
Silver Business Advantage. These packages are designed to save you costs and
protect your income through enlisting the help of Ericsson support specialists.
Call Ericsson Sales for more details.
Customer Services
vi
Europe, Middle East
and Africa
Tel:
+44 (0) 23 8048 4455
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8048 4467
Email: tvsupportemea@ericsson.com
Americas
Tel:
Tel:
Fax:
Email:
+888 671 1268
US and Canada
+678 812 6255
International
+678 812 6262
tvsupportamericas@ericsson.com Compression
China
Tel:
Fax:
Tel:
Fax:
Email:
+86 10 8476 8676
+86 10 8476 7741
+852 2590 2388
+852 2590 9550
tvsupportapac@ericsson.com
Australia and New
Zealand
Tel:
+612 (0) 9111 4027
Fax: +612 (0) 9111 4949
Email: tvsupportanz@ericsson.com
Internet Address
www.ericsson.com
Beijing
Beijing
Hong Kong
Hong Kong
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preliminary Pages
Technical Training
Ericsson provides a wide range of training courses on the operation and
maintenance of our products and on their supporting technologies. Ericsson can
provide both regularly scheduled courses and training tailored to individual needs.
Courses can be run either at your premises or at one of our dedicated training
facilities.
International
Tel:
+44 (0) 23 8048 4229
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8048 4161
Email: tvglobaltraining@ericsson.com
Customer Services and Technical Training Postal Address
Ericsson
Unit 2
Strategic Park
Comines Way
Hedge End
Southampton
Hampshire
SO30 4DA
United Kingdom
Return of Equipment
If you need to return equipment for repair please contact your local Ericsson
Customer Services Department.
Please refer to the Customer Services Contact Information on Page vi
You will then be directed to return the faulty equipment to a repair centre with
the appropriate facilities for that equipment. A tracking number will be issued that
should be used if you need to enquire about the progress of the repair. The
equipment should be properly packed and the tracking number should be clearly
marked on the outside of the packaging.
Technical Publications
If you need to contact Ericsson Technical Publications regarding this publication,
e-mail: tvtechpubs@ericsson.com.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
vii
Preliminary Pages
BLANK
viii
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1 Introduction
Chapter 1
Contents
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.4.1 1.1.4.2 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.1.1 1.2.1.2 1.2.1.3 1.2.1.4 1.2.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.1.1 1.3.1.2 1.3.1.3 1.3.1.4 1.3.1.5 1.3.1.6 1.3.1.7 1.3.1.8 1.3.2 1.3.2.1 1.3.2.2 1.3.2.3 1.3.2.4 1.3.2.5 1.3.3 1.3.3.1 1.3.3.2 1.3.3.3 1.3.3.4 1.3.3.5 1.3.4 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction........................................................................................... 1-3 Who Should Use this Reference Guide ................................................ 1-3 Software Version .................................................................................. 1-3 New Features in this Release............................................................... 1-3 What Equipment is Covered by this Reference Guide ......................... 1-4 SPR1100 Stand-alone Options ............................................................ 1-4 SPR1100 1+1 Redundant Bundle Options ........................................... 1-6 SPR1100 Systems Overview ............................................................. 1-10 Application Overview: Broadcast Transcoding ................................... 1-10 Application #1: Channel Tiering.......................................................... 1-10 Application #2: Disaster Recovery...................................................... 1-11 Application #3: New Services ............................................................. 1-11 Application #4: Cable Architecture Evolution...................................... 1-12 Standalone and 1 + 1 Packages......................................................... 1-12 Summary of Features ......................................................................... 1-14 Video Processing................................................................................ 1-14 License Enabled Resolutions ............................................................. 1-14 Video Transcoding.............................................................................. 1-14 Video Pass Through ........................................................................... 1-15 Quantity of Video Transcodes per Module ......................................... 1-15 Number of Transport Streams ............................................................ 1-16 PiP Generation ................................................................................... 1-17 One-to-Many Transcoding.................................................................. 1-17 Output Video Duplication.................................................................... 1-18 Audio Processing................................................................................ 1-18 Audio Transcoding.............................................................................. 1-18 Quantity of Audio Transcodes per Module ......................................... 1-18 Quantity of Audio Transcodes per Video Service ............................... 1-19 Quantity of Audio Pass Through......................................................... 1-19 Output Audio Duplication.................................................................... 1-20 Data PIDs ........................................................................................... 1-20 Data Pass Through............................................................................. 1-20 Quantity of Data Pass Through .......................................................... 1-20 Output Data Duplication ..................................................................... 1-20 Subtitles.............................................................................................. 1-21 Closed Captions ................................................................................. 1-21 Service Components .......................................................................... 1-21 1-1
Introduction
1.3.5 1.3.5.1 1.3.5.2 1.3.6 1.3.6.1 1.3.7 1.3.7.1 1.3.8 1.3.8.1 1.3.9 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3 1.6.4 PID Processing .................................................................................. 1-21 PID Remapping .................................................................................. 1-21 Change of Input PIDs ......................................................................... 1-21 Table Processing................................................................................ 1-22 Multiple PMTs in a PID....................................................................... 1-22 Transport Streams.............................................................................. 1-22 Unicast Input ...................................................................................... 1-22 Redundancy ....................................................................................... 1-22 Redundancy Switch Times................................................................. 1-23 SPR1100 and nCC............................................................................. 1-23 Front Panel......................................................................................... 1-24 Base Units .......................................................................................... 1-25 Rear Panels ....................................................................................... 1-26 SPR11/CHASSIS/1AC – 1U Unit with Single AC Power Supply........ 1-26 SPR11/CHASSIS/2AC – 1U Unit with Dual AC Power Supply .......... 1-26 SPR11/CHASSIS/1DC – 1U Unit with Single DC Supply .................. 1-27 SPR11/CHASSIS/2DC – 1U Unit with Dual DC Power Supply.......... 1-27 List of Figures
Figure 1.1 Figure 1.2 Figure 1.3 Figure 1.4 Figure 1.5 Figure 1.6 Figure 1.7 Figure 1.8 Figure 1.9 SPR1100 Channel Tiering.................................................................. 1-11 SPR1100 Cable Architecture Evolution.............................................. 1-12 SPR1100 Standalone System............................................................ 1-13 SPR1100 1+1 Redundant System ..................................................... 1-13 SPR1100 Front Panel ........................................................................ 1-24 SPR11/CHASSIS/1AC Rear Panel – Single AC Input ....................... 1-26 SPR11/CHASSIS/2AC Rear Panel – Dual AC Inputs ........................ 1-26 SPR11/CHASSIS/1DC Rear Panel – Single DC Input....................... 1-27 SPR11/CHASSIS/2DC Rear Panel – Dual DC Inputs........................ 1-27 List of Tables
Table 1.1 Equipment Model Descriptions (Stand-alone Unit) .............................. 1-4 Table 1.2 Hardware Options (Stand-alone Unit) .................................................. 1-4 Table 1.3 Software Options (Stand-alone Unit).................................................... 1-4 Table 1.4 Equipment Model Descriptions (1+1 Redundant Units) ....................... 1-6 Table 1.5 Hardware Options (1+1 Redundant Units) ........................................... 1-7 Table 1.6 Software Options (1+1 Redundant Units) ............................................ 1-7 Table 1.7 License Enabled Resolutions ............................................................. 1-14 Table 1.8 General Transcoding Permutations.................................................... 1-14 Table 1.9 SPR1100 NSTC Transcoding Permutations ...................................... 1-15 Table 1.10 SPR1100 PAL Transcoding Permutations ......................................... 1-15 Table 1.11 Mix and Match of Video Transodes in a Module ................................ 1-16 Table 1.12 Transcoded Video Options................................................................. 1-17 Table 1.13 Maximum Quantity of Audio Transcodes per Module ........................ 1-18 Table 1.14 Quantity of Audio Transcodes per Video Service............................... 1-19 Table 1.15 Redundancy Switch Times................................................................. 1-23 Table 1.16 Front Panel Controls .......................................................................... 1-24 Table 1.17 Rear Panel Connectors ...................................................................... 1-27 1-2
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
1.1
Introduction
1.1.1
Who Should Use this Reference Guide
This Reference Guide is written for operators / users of the Ericsson SPR1100
Stream Processor. It describes the unit’s functions and operation. The Reference
Guide is written to assist in the installation and day-to-day care and operation of the
unit. Maintenance information requiring the covers to be removed is not included.
Warning!
Do not remove the covers of this equipment. Hazardous voltages are present within
this equipment and may be exposed if the covers are removed. Only Ericsson
television trained and approved service engineers are permitted to service this
equipment.
Caution!
Unauthorized maintenance or the use of non-approved replacements may affect the
equipment specification and invalidate any warranties.
1.1.2
Software Version
This Reference Guide covers the functions of software version 6.7.x and later.
To verify the installed version either:

Access the front panel; see Chapter 4, Front Panel Control.

Access the Web Browser screens, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Configuration.
This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent build versions where the
functionality of the equipment has not changed. Where the build standard changes
the functionality, a new issue of this manual will be provided.
The appropriate number should be quoted in all correspondence with Ericsson.
1.1.3
New Features in this Release
The 6.7.x release of software for the SPR1100 is delivered with the new features
listed below:

Reflex: enables the cost-effective creation of statmux groups by combining the
video processing, statmux controller and mux into a single chassis.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-3
Introduction

1.1.4
Audio Leveling Control: enables operators to comply with national legislation
mandating audio leveling control on services.
What Equipment is Covered by this Reference Guide
This Reference Guide covers the SPR1100 Stream Processor and options as listed
in the following tables.
1.1.4.1
Table 1.1
SPR1100 Stand-alone Options
Equipment Model Descriptions (Stand-alone Unit)
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR11/CHASSIS/1AC
FAZ 101 0161/1
KDU 137 733/1
SPR1100 Chassis with Single
AC PSU.
SPR11/CHASSIS/2AC
FAZ 101 0161/2
KDU 137 733/2
SPR1100 Chassis with Dual AC
PSU.
SPR11/CHASSIS/1DC
FAZ 101 0161/3
KDU 137 733/3
SPR1100 Chassis with Single
DC PSU.
SPR11/CHASSIS/2DC
FAZ 101 0161/4
KDU 137 733/4
SPR1100 Chassis with Dual DC
PSU.
Table 1.2
Hardware Options (Stand-alone Unit)
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR/HWO/MPM1
FAZ 101 0161/57
ROA 128 4612
SPR Media Processing Module
for video & audio. 4 HD or 12
SD video
SPR/UPG/HWO/MPM1
FAZ 101 0161/59
ROA 128 4613
SPR Media Processing Module
for video & audio. 4 HD or 12
SD video
SPR/UPG/HWO/BLNK
FAZ 101 0161/11
SXA 215 3768/2
SPR Blanking Plate
Table 1.3
Software Options (Stand-alone Unit)
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR/SWO/HDMP4
FAZ 101 0161/13
FAT 102 0831
SPR license 1 HD/SD
MPEG-4/2 video service
SPR/SWO/HDMP2
FAZ 101 0161/14
FAT 102 0832
SPR license 1 HD/SD MPEG-2
video service
SPR/SWO/SDMP4
FAZ 101 0161/15
FAT 102 0833
SPR license 1 SD MPEG-4/2
video service
1-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR/SWO/SDMP2
FAZ 101 0161/16
FAT 102 0834
SPR license 1 SD MPEG-2
video service
SPR/SWO/PIP
FAZ 101 0161/17
FAT 102 0835
SPR license 1 PiP service
SPR/SWO/AUD/MP2
FAZ 101 0161/18
FAT 102 0836
SPR license 1 stereo audio
transcode to MPEG-1/2 LII
SPR/SWO/AUD/AAC
FAZ 101 0161/19
FAT 102 0837
SPR license 1 stereo audio
transcode to HE-AAC-LC
SPR/SWO/AUD/AC3
FAZ 101 0161/20
FAT 102 0838
SPR license 1 stereo audio
transcode to Dolby Digital AC3
SPR/SWO/AUD/AC3DEC
FAZ 101 0161/95
FAT 102 0585
SPR license 1 audio Dolby
Digital AC3 DECODE
SPR/SWO/FEC/OUT
FAZ 101 0161/96
FAT 102 1602
SPR license 1 ProMPEG FEC
output
SPR/SWO/ALC/C
FAZ 101 0161/111
FAT 102 2443
SPR license 1 ALCv2 stereo
pair Charged
SPR/SWO/ALC/F
FAZ 101 0161/112
FAT 102 2444
SPR license 1 ALCv2 stereo
pair Free
SPR/SWO/IREFLEX
FAZ 101 0161/136
FAT 102 2720
SPR license 1 statmux MPTS
SPR/UPG/SWO/HDMP4
FAZ 101 0161/29
FAT 102 0839
SPR license 1 HD/SD
MPEG-4/2 video service
SPR/UPG/SWO/HDMP2
FAZ 101 0161/30
FAT 102 0840
SPR license 1 HD/SD MPEG-2
video service
SPR/UPG/SWO/SDMP4
FAZ 101 0161/31
FAT 102 0841
SPR license 1 SD MPEG-4/2
video service
SPR/UPG/SWO/SDMP2
FAZ 101 0161/32
FAT 102 0842
SPR license 1 SD MPEG-2
video service
SPR/UPG/SWO/PIP
FAZ 101 0161/33
FAT 102 0843
SPR license 1 PiP service
SPR/UPG/SWO/AUD/MP2
FAZ 101 0161/34
FAT 102 0844
SPR license 1 stereo audio
transcode to MPEG-1/2 LII
SPR/UPG/SWO/AUD/AAC
FAZ 101 0161/35
FAT 102 0845
SPR license 1 stereo audio
transcode to HE-AAC-LC
SPR/UPG/SWO/AUD/AC3
FAZ 101 0161/36
FAT 102 0846
SPR license 1 stereo audio
transcode to Dolby Digital AC3
SPR/UPG/SWO/AUD/AC3D
EC
FAZ 101 0161/76
FAT 102 1607
SPR upgrade license 1 audio
Dolby Digital AC3 decode
SPR/UPG/SWO/FEC/OUT
FAZ 101 0161/77
FAT 102 1608
SPR upgrade license 1
ProMPEG FEC output
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-5
Introduction
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR/UPG/SWO/SD2/SD4
FAZ 101 0161/37
FAT 102 0847
SPR upgrade license from SD
MPEG-2 to SD MPEG-4
SPR/UPG/SWO/SD2/HD2
FAZ 101 0161/38
FAT 102 0849
SPR upgrade license from SD
MPEG-2 to HD MPEG-2
SPR/UPG/SWO/SD2/HD4
FAZ 101 0161/39
FAT 102 0850
SPR upgrade license from SD
MPEG-2 to HD MPEG-4
SPR/UPG/SWO/SD4/HD2
FAZ 101 0161/40
FAT 102 0851
SPR upgrade license from SD
MPEG-4 to HD MPEG-2
SPR/UPG/SWO/SD4/HD4
FAZ 101 0161/41
FAT 102 0852
SPR upgrade license from SD
MPEG-4 to HD MPEG-4
SPR/UPG/SWO/HD2/HD4
FAZ 101 0161/42
FAT 102 0853
SPR upgrade license from HD
MPEG-2 to HD MPEG-4
SPR/UPG/SWO/1100/1200
FAZ 101 0161/82
FAT 102 1613
SPR convert SPR1100 to
SPR1200
SPR/UPG/SWO/ALC/C
FAZ 101 0161/115
FAT 102 2445
SPR upgrade license 1 ALCv2
stereo pair charged
SPR/UPG/SWO/ALC/F
FAZ 101 0161/116
FAT 102 2446
SPR upgrade license 1 ALCv2
stereo pair free
SPR/UPG/SWO/IREFLEX
FAZ 101 0161/138
FAT 102 2721
SPR upgrade license 1 statmux
MPTS
1.1.4.2
Table 1.4
SPR1100 1+1 Redundant Bundle Options
Equipment Model Descriptions (1+1 Redundant Units)
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR11/CHASSIS/1AC/RAS
FAZ 101 0161/6
1x KDU 137 733/1
1x KDU 137 733/6
SPR1100 Active Standby
Redundant Pair chassis with
Single AC PSU. 6 slots
available. *2 UNITS*
SPR11/CHASSIS/2AC/RAS
FAZ 101 0161/7
1x KDU 137 733/2
1x KDU 137 733/7
SPR1100 Active Standby
Redundant Pair chassis with
Dual AC PSU. 4 slots available.
*2 UNITS*
SPR11/CHASSIS/1DC/RAS
FAZ 101 0161/8
1x KDU 137 733/3
1x KDU 137 733/8
SPR1100 Active Standby
Redundant Pair chassis with
Single DC PSU. 6 slots
available. *2 UNITS*
SPR11/CHASSIS/2DC/RAS
FAZ 101 0161/9
1x KDU 137 733/4
1x KDU 137 733/9
SPR1100 Active Standby
Redundant Pair chassis with
Dual DC PSU. 4 slots available.
*2 UNITS*
1-6
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR11/CHASSIS/1AC/RAA
FAZ 101 0161/66
2x KDU 137 733/1
SPR1100 Active Standby
Redundant Pair chassis with
Single AC PSU. 6 slots
available. *2 UNITS*
SPR11/CHASSIS/2AC/RAA
FAZ 101 0161/67
2x KDU 137 733/2
SPR1100 Active Standby
Redundant Pair chassis with
Dual AC PSU. 4 slots available.
*2 UNITS*
SPR11/CHASSIS/1DC/RAA
FAZ 101 0161/68
2x KDU 137 733/3
SPR1100 Active Standby
Redundant Pair chassis with
Single DC PSU. 6 slots
available. *2 UNITS*
SPR11/CHASSIS/2DC/RAA
FAZ 101 0161/69
2x KDU 137 733/4
SPR1100 Active Standby
Redundant Pair chassis with
Dual DC PSU. 4 slots available.
*2 UNITS*
Table 1.5
Hardware Options (1+1 Redundant Units)
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR/HWO/MPM1/R
FAZ 101 0161/58
2x ROA 128 4612
SPR Redundant Pair: Media
Processing Module video +
audio. 4HD/12SD *2
MODULES*
SPR/UPG/HWO/MPM1/R
FAZ 101 0161/60
2x ROA 128 4613
SPR Redundant Pair: Media
Processing Module video +
audio. 4HD/12SD *2
MODULES*
SPR/UPG/HWO/BLNK/R
FAZ 101 0161/12
2x SXA 215 3768/2
SPR Redundant Pair: Blanking
Plate *2 BLANKS, 1 for each
chassis*
Table 1.6
Software Options (1+1 Redundant Units)
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR/SWO/HDMP4/R
FAZ 101 0161/21
2x FAT 102 0831
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
HD/SD MPEG-4/2 video service
SPR/SWO/HDMP2/R
FAZ 101 0161/22
2x FAT 102 0832
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
HD/SD MPEG-2 video service
SPR/SWO/SDMP4/R
FAZ 101 0161/23
2x FAT 102 0833
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
SD MPEG-4/2 video service
SPR/SWO/SDMP2/R
FAZ 101 0161/24
2x FAT 102 0834
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
SD MPEG-2 video service
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-7
Introduction
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR/SWO/PIP/R
FAZ 101 0161/25
2x FAT 102 0835
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
PiP service
SPR/SWO/AUD/MP2/R
FAZ 101 0161/26
2x FAT 102 0836
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
stereo audio transcode to
MPEG-1/2 LII
SPR/SWO/AUD/AAC/R
FAZ 101 0161/27
2x FAT 102 0837
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
stereo audio transcode to HEAAC-LC
SPR/SWO/AUD/AC3/R
FAZ 101 0161/28
2x FAT 102 0838
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
stereo audio transcode to Dolby
Digital AC3
SPR/SWO/AUD/AC3DEC/R
FAZ 101 0161/101
2x FAT 102 0585
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
audio Dolby Digital AC3
DECODE
SPR/SWO/FEC/OUT/R
FAZ 101 0161/102
2x FAT 102 1602
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
ProMPEG FEC output
SPR/SWO/ALC/C/R
FAZ 101 0161/113
2x FAT 102 2443
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
ALCv2 stereo pair Charged
SPR/SWO/ALC/F/R
FAZ 101 0161/114
2x FAT 102 2444
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
ALCv2 stereo pair Free
SPR/SWO/IREFLEX/R
FAZ 101 0161/137
2x FAT 102 2720
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
statmux MPTS
SPR/UPG/SWO/HDMP4/R
FAZ 101 0161/43
2x FAT 102 0839
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
HD/SD MPEG-4/2 video service
SPR/UPG/SWO/HDMP2/R
FAZ 101 0161/44
2x FAT 102 0840
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
HD/SD MPEG-2 video service
SPR/UPG/SWO/SDMP4/R
FAZ 101 0161/45
2x FAT 102 0841
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
SD MPEG-4/2 video service
SPR/UPG/SWO/SDMP2/R
FAZ 101 0161/46
2x FAT 102 0842
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
SD MPEG-2 video service
SPR/UPG/SWO/PIP/R
FAZ 101 0161/47
2x FAT 102 0843
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
PiP service
SPR/UPG/SWO/AUD/MP2/R
FAZ 101 0161/48
2x FAT 102 0844
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
stereo audio transcode to
MPEG-1/2 LII
SPR/UPG/SWO/AUD/AAC/R
FAZ 101 0161/49
2x FAT 102 0845
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
stereo audio transcode to HEAAC-LC
SPR/UPG/SWO/AUD/AC3/R
FAZ 101 0161/50
2x FAT 102 0846
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
stereo audio transcode to Dolby
Digital AC3
1-8
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
SPR/UPG/SWO/AUD/AC3D
EC/R
FAZ 101 0161/84
2x FAT 102 1607
SPR Redundant Pair: upgrade
license 1 audio Dolby Digital
AC3 decode
SPR/UPG/SWO/FEC/OUT/R
FAZ 101 0161/85
2x FAT 102 1608
SPR Redundant Pair: upgrade
license 1 ProMPEG FEC output
SPR/UPG/SWO/SD2/SD4/R
FAZ 101 0161/51
2x FAT 102 0847
SPR Redundant Pair: upgrade
license from SD MPEG-2 to SD
MPEG-4
SPR/UPG/SWO/SD2/HD2/R
FAZ 101 0161/52
2x FAT 102 0849
SPR Redundant Pair: upgrade
license from SD MPEG-2 to HD
MPEG-2
SPR/UPG/SWO/SD2/HD4/R
FAZ 101 0161/53
2x FAT 102 0850
SPR Redundant Pair: upgrade
license from SD MPEG-2 to HD
MPEG-4
SPR/UPG/SWO/SD4/HD2/R
FAZ 101 0161/54
2x FAT 102 0851
SPR Redundant Pair: upgrade
license from SD MPEG-4 to HD
MPEG-2
SPR/UPG/SWO/SD4/HD4/R
FAZ 101 0161/55
2x FAT 102 0852
SPR Redundant Pair: upgrade
license from SD MPEG-4 to HD
MPEG-4
SPR/UPG/SWO/HD2/HD4/R
FAZ 101 0161/56
2x FAT 102 0853
SPR Redundant Pair: upgrade
license from HD MPEG-2 to HD
MPEG-4
SPR/UPG/SWO/1100/1200/R FAZ 101 0161/92
1x FAT 102 1613
1x FAT 102 1615
SPR Redundant Pair: convert
SPR1100 to SPR1200
SPR/UPG/SWO/RAS/RAA
FAZ 101 0161/86
1x FAT 102 1617
SPR Redundant Pair: convert
active-standby pair to activeactive pair
SPR/UPG/SWO/RAA/RAS
FAZ 101 0161/87
1x FAT 102 1618
SPR Redundant Pair: convert
active-active pair to activestandby pair
SPR/UPG/SWO/ALC/C/R
FAZ 101 0161/117
2x FAT 102 2445
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
ALCv2 stereo pair charged
SPR/UPG/SWO/ALC/F/R
FAZ 101 0161/118
2x FAT 102 2446
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
ALCv2 stereo pair free
2x FAT 102 2720
SPR Redundant Pair: license 1
statmux MPTS
SPR/UPG/SWO/IREFLEX/R
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-9
Introduction
1.2
SPR1100 Systems Overview
The Ericsson SPR1100 is a high-density-broadcast video processor for operators to
launch additional television services to the home, manage and migrate to MPEG-4
AVC, simplify time-shift TV ingest processing, and enable cost-efficient disaster
recovery sites for business continuity.
Designed for video-turnaround applications requiring video and audio transcoding or
bit-rate changing, the Ericsson SPR1100 supports any-to-any MPEG-2 / MPEG-4
AVC / HD / SD transcoding for up to 24 HD or 72 SD video services, up to 144
stereo audio services and can simultaneously generate Picture-in-Picture (PIP)
service for all channels processed.
The SPR1100 Stream Processor is suited for Telco and Cable IPTV platforms. In
addition, it can serve as a high-quality bit-rate changer allowing for lower overall bit
rates or VBR to CBR conversion for applications such as time-shift TV ingest.
1.2.1
Application Overview: Broadcast Transcoding
The SPR1100 targets four application areas.
1.2.1.1
Application #1: Channel Tiering
Operators have extensive channel line-ups, but not all channels are treated equally.
Some channels are premium and drive the majority of viewing figures, whereas
other channels represent the long-tail of viewing. Such channels include, for
example, must-carry channels, specialist channels, etc.
Presenting operators with a single product to cover this range is not viable.
Premium products are too expensive for the long-tail channels, whereas nonpremium products do not offer sufficient picture quality for the main channels.
The solution is a product range that enables channel tiering. In Ericsson’s case, the
VPC chassis coupled with EN-series cards represents our premium offering, with a
focus on picture quality and the expense of density. The SPR1100 targets the longtail channels, and focuses on density whilst making as small a compromise as
possible in picture quality.
1-10
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
Figure 1.1 SPR1100 Channel Tiering
1.2.1.2
Application #2: Disaster Recovery
Many operators run disaster recovery sites in case some localized issue (flooding,
fire damage, power loss, adverse weather, etc.) prevents the main head-end from
working. Disaster recovery sites therefore exist to temporarily take over from the
main site.
Such sites are run to a budget, because it does not make sense to replicate an
expensive, premium head-end if the back-up head-end is only for occasional,
temporary use. Hence space is at a premium (real-estate being a key method to
reduce costs), and the need for premium picture quality is also reduced if this is a
route for cost reduction.
In such applications, the SPR1100 is a perfect offering. It can cover the entire
channel line-up in only a few chassis, and offers very low cost per channel pricing.
1.2.1.3
Application #3: New Services
Operators are always looking to deploy new value-added services in order to reduce
user churn and remain competitive. However, such new services need to fit into
existing head-end real-estate and, as ever more services are added, space
becomes a constraining factor.
The next service launch operators are targeting is catch-up TV, in which channels
are encoded differently to the linear channel ready for recording. For example, in a
cable system, linear channels might all be encoded using MPEG-2 for backward
compatibility with old boxes. The catch-up service, however, can be targeted only at
newer H264-capable boxes, and hence can take advantage of the better bit rate
efficiency of H264.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-11
Introduction
The SPR1100 is therefore ideal for such services, because it is a very spaceefficient solution to providing parallel encoding of TV services.
1.2.1.4
Application #4: Cable Architecture Evolution
Cable operators evolve through different architectures as they add new services
(raising bandwidth requirements) and attempt to manage cost (by reducing
bandwidth consumed). Figure 1.2 below illustrates this progression, with network
types shown in grey text and solution types in green text. Dense transcoding, as
fulfilled by the SPR1100, is highlighted in red text.
Figure 1.2 SPR1100 Cable Architecture Evolution
1.2.2
Standalone and 1 + 1 Packages
The Ericsson SPR1100 is available as two main packages:

A Standalone unit

A bundle of two units for 1+1 automatic redundancy
The unit has a number
ber of reliability features including choice of single or dual power
supply and hot-swap processing modules for in-field servicing and expansion. An
advanced web-based user interface allows easy configuration, without the need for
an external control system, which allows the Ericsson SPR1100 to be added to any
existing installation needing dense video transcoding.
1-12
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
Figure 1.3 SPR1100 Standalone System
A large number of services can be processed in a single unit. With the addition of a
backup unit you can ensure that services remain on-air.
For redundant operation, 1+1 redundant pair configuration units is recommended as
an n+1 configuration for redundancy would create unacceptable service outages
during redundancy switch time. The high availability configuration with a hot-standby
spare running as automatic 1+1 mirrored units ensures maximum reliability and
service up-time.
Figure 1.4 SPR1100 1+1 Redundant System
The 1+1 redundant pair units are designed as a matched pair, and will only work
when they are connected together as a redundant pair.
1+1 redundant operation is controlled by the SPR1100 unit itself: it does not need or
use nCompass Control by Ericsson for redundancy control.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-13
Introduction
1.3
Summary of Features
1.3.1
Video Processing
1.3.1.1
License Enabled Resolutions
Software licenses and upgrade options are available from Ericsson to enable
operation and transcoding at the required resolutions.
Table 1.7 License Enabled Resolutions
License
16:9 Resolutions
4:3 Resolutions
HD MPEG-4
1080i x 1920 \ 1440 \ 1280
(@ 25 and 29.97 fps)
N/A
HD MPEG-2
1080pSF 1080 x 1920
(@ 23.976 fps)
720p x 1280 / 960
(@50 and 59.94 fps)
SD MPEG-4
SD MPEG-2
PiP
576i x 720 / 704 / 640 / 544 / 528 / 480 / 352
(@ 25 fps and 29.97 fps)
MPEG-4 MP @ L1.3
128x96, 96x96, 192x192, 144x144
(@ 25 and 29.97 fps)
1.3.1.2
Video Transcoding
The SPR1100 permits a large number of transcoding permutations:
Table 1.8 General Transcoding Permutations
1-14
IN
OUT
Includes
MPEG-2 or MPEG-4
MPEG-2 or MPEG-4
Transrating & transcoding
SD or HD
SD or HD
Up and down conversion
MPTS or SPTS
MPTS or SPTS
Video VBR or CBR
CBR only
Unicast or multicast
Unicast or multicast
Progressive to Interlace at
720p60
SD Interlaced
resolutions
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
Table 1.9 SPR1100 NSTC Transcoding Permutations
Outputs
INPUT
NSTC i30
HD 1080i
720p
1080i
720p
SD
1080PsF
PIP
i25
1920
i30
1440
i30
1280
i30
1280
P60
960
P60
720
i30
704
i30
640
i30
544
i30
528
i30
480
i30
352
i30
1920
P23.976
1920 x 1080i 30
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
1440 (NSTC)
1280
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1280 x 720p 60
960 (NSTC)
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
720
704
640
544 480 i30
528 (NSTC)
480
352
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
SD
1080PsF
23.976 Hz
Any Res
1920
N
x 1080PsF
23.976
192x192 144x144 128x96
i30
i30
i30
96x96
i30
Y
Table 1.10 SPR1100 PAL Transcoding Permutations
Outputs
INPUT
PAL i25
HD 1080i
720p
i30
1080i
1920
i25
1440
i25
720p
SD
1080PsF
1280
i25
1280
P50
960
P50
720
i25
704
i25
640
i25
544
i25
528
i25
480
i25
352
i25
1920
P23.976
PIP
192x192 144x144 128x96
i25
i25
i25
96x96
i25
1920 x 1080i 25
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
1440 (PAL)
1280
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1280 x 720p 50
960 (PAL)
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
720
704
640
544 480 i25
528 (PAL)
480
352
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
SD
1080PsF
23.976 Hz
Any Res
1920
N
x 1080PsF
23.976
Note:
Y
The SPR1100 is a full decode and re-encode solution, unlike some
competitor products that can only achieve density by running in a rateshaping mode. However, this does mean performance of the SPR1100 is
determined partly by the nature of the upstream device – if this produces a
non-standard transport stream, the SPR1100 may not be able to decode it.
The SPR1100 cannot transcode:
1.3.1.3

Across frame rates; 25, 29.98 and 23.976 fps.

Interlaced to progressive.
Video Pass Through
Video Pass through is not possible on the SPR1100.
1.3.1.4
Quantity of Video Transcodes per Module
The maximum number of video transcodes per module is as follows:
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-15
Introduction

Up to 12 SD to SD transcodes.

Up to four transcodes that have an HD input and/or output.
Note:

The quantities listed above are only dependent on the resolution. They are
independent of the codec i.e. MPEG-2 or MPEG-4.
Video transcodes can be mixed and matched in a suitable module as shown in
Table 1.11.
Table 1.11 Mix and Match of Video Transodes in a Module
Number of HD Transcodes
Number of SD Transcodes
0
Up to 12
1
Up to 9
2
Up to 6
3
Up to 3
4
0
For example; the following transcoding scenarios are possible:

3 x SD MPEG-2 can be transcoded to SD MPEG-4.

3 x SD MPEG-4 can be transcoded to SD MPEG-4

1 x HD MPEG-4 can be transcoded to SD MPEG-4.

1 x HD MPEG-4 can be transcoded to HD MPEG-4.
The number of SD to SD transcodes that can be carried out by a module has an
additional limitation. There are four transcoding chips on each module and each chip
can carry out three SD to SD transcodes but all transcodes on the chips must be the
same i.e. all SD MPEG-2 to SD MPEG-4 or all SD MPEG-4 to SD MPEG-4.
For example; a module can carry out the following video transcodes:

3 x SD MPEG-2 to SD MPEG-4

9 x SD MPEG-4 to SD MPEG-2
But can out carry the following transcodes:
1.3.1.5

2 x SD MPEG-2 to SD MPEG-4

10 x SD MPEG-4 to SD MPEG-2
Number of Transport Streams
The current release of the SPR1100 can ingest up to 64 transport streams. This can
impact SD transcoding density if all inputs are SPTS.
1-16
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
1.3.1.6
PiP Generation
One PiP can be generated for each video transcode as shown in the following
examples:

For up to 72 SD services, 72 PiPs can be generated.

For up to 24 HD services, 24 PiPs can be generated.

For up to 10 SD and 12 HD services, 22 PiPs can be generated.
Notes: If a PiP is not generated for one video transcode, then this unused PiP can
be used to generate 2 PiPs on another video transcode.
The Pip time is aligned to the main video both have the same PTS
(Presentation Time Stamp) value.
1.3.1.6.1
Creating a PiP in a SPTS
A PiP is normally created in an MPTS with the main video but it is also possible to
create a PiP in a new SPTS while the main video remains in a separate SPTS.
Note the current software release for the SPR1100 only supports a maximum of 72
individual transport streams. Therefore when running with PiP in a separate SPTS,
the number of output transport streams is limited to 36.
To create a PiP in a separate SPTS:
1. Create a new PiP service.
2. Create a new TS Output Stream.
3. Drag and drop the PiP component into the new output stream.
1.3.1.7
One-to-Many Transcoding
It is possible to transcode an input video multiple times to different formats and
different bit rates. See Table 1.12 for examples.
Table 1.12 Transcoded Video Options
Input
Possible Outputs
MPEG-4 HD
MPEG-4 HD
MPEG-4 SD
MPEG-4 SD different bit rate
An input video stream can be duplicated by up to twice the number of modules in
the chassis. A PiP can be produced with each transcoded output.
Note:
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Each transcode of the same input source counts as a different transcode,
when calculating the number of transcodes possible per module.
1-17
Introduction
1.3.1.8
Output Video Duplication
A transcoded video output can be duplicated to produce up to four copies. These
copies are required to be sent to different MPTSs and/or different IP addresses.
1.3.2
Audio Processing
1.3.2.1
Audio Transcoding
The SPR1100 can transcode between any of the formats below:

MPEG-1 layer 2

MPEG-2 layer 2

Dolby Digital (AC-3) stereo

Dolby Digital (AC-3) 5.1

HE-AAC stereo

HE-AAC 5.1

AAC-LC stereo

AAC-LC 5.1
It is possible to down-mix 5.1 to stereo, and up-mix stereo to 5.1. However, upmixing stereo to 5.1 only actually puts the stereo on the 5.1, leaving the 3.1 silent.
1.3.2.2
Quantity of Audio Transcodes per Module
The maximum number of audio transcodes per module is dependent on what it
transcodes from and to. The maximum number per module is shown in Table 1.13.
Table 1.13 Maximum Quantity of Audio Transcodes per Module
Encode to:
Decode from:
MP1 L2 2.0
DD (AC3) 2.0
DD (AC3) 5.1
HE-AAC-LC 2.0
HE-AAC-LC 5.1
MP1 L2 2.0
24
12
n/a
24
n/a
DD (AC3) 2.0
18
12
n/a
12
n/a
DD (AC3) 5.1
18
12
6
12
6
HE-AAC-LC 2.0
12
12
n/a
12
n/a
HE-AAC-LC 5.1
12
12
6
12
6
The numbers above assume that all the audio transcodes on a particular module are
the same. When mixing different audio transcodes, the maximum numbers should
be scaled accordingly.
1-18
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
Audio transcodes are carried out on the module audio daughter card and can only
be done on the same module on which the associated video is transcoded.
Consequently, audio transcodes for a video service cannot be split across two or
more modules.
1.3.2.3
Quantity of Audio Transcodes per Video Service
Up to eight audio transcodes can be carried out per video service.
The audio transcodes can be from eight different audio streams (e.g. different
languages), or can all come from one audio stream.
Table 1.14 Quantity of Audio Transcodes per Video Service
Input
Output
AAC (English)
AAC 180 kbps
AAC 90 kbps
MPEG-1 L2 200 kbps
AAC (Spanish)
AAC 180 kbps
MPEG-1 L2 200 kbps
AAC (French)
MPEG-1 L2 200 kbps
AAC (German)
MPEG-1 L2 200 kbps
AAC (Chinese)
MPEG-1 L2 200 kbps
One video service may have up to eight audio transcodes but the maximum number
of audio transcodes per module also applies.
For example, there is a maximum of 24 MPEG L2 to AAC transcodes per module
and these may be utilized as follows:

Three video services, each with eight MPEG-2 – AAC transcodes and the
remaining services with pass through audio only.
Or

1.3.2.4
Two video services, each with eight transcodes. Another two video services,
each with four transcodes (making a total of 24) and the remaining services with
pass through audio only.
Quantity of Audio Pass Through
The possible quantity of audio pass through is defined by the sum of audio and data
pass through. The following pass through scenarios are possible:

Up to eight audio and data components can be passed through per service.
These can be all audio, all data or a mix of the two.

Up to 47 audio and data components can be passed through per module.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-19
Introduction

Up to 47 (x the number of modules) audio and data components can be passed
through per chassis.
Note:
The maximum number of pass throughs per module also applies to the
above scenarios.
Each video service can therefore have up to eight transcoded audios and up to eight
passed through components (audio and data).
1.3.2.5
Output Audio Duplication
Both transcoded and passed through audio outputs can be duplicated to produce up
to four copies of each. These copies are required for sending to different MPTS’s
and/or different IP addresses.
1.3.3
Data PIDs
1.3.3.1
Data Pass Through
The SPR1100 will pass through the following:

DVB Subtitles.

Teletext.

Closed Captions (passed through and recaptioned).

WSS.

AFD (which will be corrected to reflect and aspect ratio change.

EBIF.

SCTE 127 VBI

Private data such as interactive TV, PIDs and tables.
Data PIDs are passed through and re-time aligned with the transcoded video they
are associated with.
1.3.3.2
Quantity of Data Pass Through
The possible quantity of audio pass through is defined by the sum of audio and data
pass through. See Section 1.3.2.4 for further details.
1.3.3.3
Output Data Duplication
Output data can be duplicated to produce up to four copies of each. These copies
are required for sending to different MPTS’s and/or different IP addresses.
1-20
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
1.3.3.4
Subtitles
When subtitles are passed through with a video stream that is either up or down
converted, the subtitle text size is not rescaled, so it appears too big or small for the
new video resolution. For example:

When the video is down converted (HD to SD) the subtitle text becomes smaller.

When the video is up converted (SD to HD) the subtitle text becomes larger.
The text position may also be incorrect.
1.3.3.5
Closed Captions
Closed captions in the incoming Transport Stream will be encoded in the output
stream using:
1.3.4

ATSC A/53 in MPEG-2 video.

ATSC A/72 in MPEG-4 video.
Service Components
Each service must have one video stream and must have:

1 PiP.

Up to eight transcoded audio streams,
And

Up to eight passed through components (which may be all audio, all data or a
mix of audio and data).
1.3.5
PID Processing
1.3.5.1
PID Remapping
In the default setting, the PIDs on the input service elements are carried through
onto the output service. However, the PID numbers can be changed on any or all of
the PIDs in a service and they are remapped accordingly in the PMT.
PID remapping is always required when duplication of a service or service element
is performed as copies cannot have the same PID.
1.3.5.2
Change of Input PIDs
If a PID on an input service is changed, the SPR1100 cannot automatically follow
the change. Within the unit, the link between the input and output service is made on
the service name and not the PID number. However, the input PID is linked to the
input service name, so, if the PID changes, the link to the service name is lost.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-21
Introduction
1.3.6
Table Processing
The SPR1100 generates the following tables:

PAT (Program Association Table).

PMT (Program Map Table).

SDT (Service Descriptor Table).

CAT (Conditional Access Table).
The SPR1100 will not pass through or process any other tables and these, including
the following, will be dropped:
1.3.6.1

EIT (Event Information Table).

NIT (Network Information Table).

SDT (Service Description Table).
Multiple PMTs in a PID
The SPR1100 can support incoming MPTSs where the PMTs for the services are in
one PID.
1.3.7
Transport Streams
1.3.7.1
Unicast Input
An incoming unicast is detected by its IP address. If the IP address is outside the
reserved multicast address range, it is treated as a unicast.
1.3.8
Redundancy
The SPR1100 supports the following redundancy modes:

Input source redundancy.

Input port redundancy:


-
Active active 1+1 redundant pair or
-
2 inputs adding together i.e. each receiving different streams.
Output Port redundancy:
-
Active standby only.
-
No active active yet.
Chassis redundancy:
-
1-22
1+1 active standby.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction

1+1 active active.
PSU (when dual PSU fitted).
The SPR1100 does not support the following redundancy modes:
1.3.8.1

Module level.

Service Level.
Redundancy Switch Times
Redundancy switch times are shown in Table 1.15.
Table 1.15 Redundancy Switch Times
Redundancy Mode
Failure Mode
Switch Over Behavior
Switch Time
Input source
Input port
0s as active
active input
Output port
1+1 chassis (activestandby)
Manual switch
1.5 - 4 s
Loss of IP input (all
multicasts)
2-3s
Loss of one service
2-3s
Critical alarm from primary to
secondary chassis across
control line
Primary stops streaming, &
secondary starts to stream
2-3s
Power loss on primary
chassis
* Secondary sends MGP to
primary to enforce that it isn’t
streaming,
7 - 10 s
* then secondary starts to
stream
Control line between primary
& secondary chassis is lost
* Secondary sends MGP to
primary to enforce that it isn’t
streaming,
7 - 10 s
* then secondary starts to
stream
1.3.9
SPR1100 and nCC
SPR1100 is configured via its own internal web browser.
The SPR1100 GUI web page is usually opened using a web browser on a PC.
However, it is also possible to open the GUI web page from within nCC and to
configure the SPR1100 as normal on that web page.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-23
Introduction
Note:
The SPR1100 is not being configured from nCC, it can only be viewed.
nCC also monitors alarms from the SPR1100 and displays them on its GUI.
nCC shows which unit is active in a 1+1 SPR1100 pair. It can also force a manual
redundancy switch.
1.4
Front Panel
The user interface for the Front Panel consists of an alphanumeric Liquid Crystal
Display, pushbuttons, and a status LED that are used to set-up, control and monitor
the unit.
Various menu screens can be navigated on the LCD using the pushbuttons, which
allow you to select and modify key parameters and features of the unit.
Full details of the front panel menus and information on the use of these controls is
given in Chapter 3, Front Panel Control.
Status LED
LCD
Edit
Left
Save
USB
Up
Right
Down
Figure 1.5 SPR1100 Front Panel
Table 1.16 Front Panel Controls
Item
Color
Description
USB Connector
-
This connector is for factory / service use only.
Status LED
Red
Fault. Indicates a fault condition, e.g. a missing or
faulty input signal. It should be off for correct
operation, although it may be lit briefly during
power up.
Amber
Locked / Non-Functional. Indicates that the unit
is locked to a Transport Stream, but also indicates
incorrect conditions or incorrect system
functioning.
Green
Locked / Functional. Indicates that the unit is
locked to a Transport Stream and also indicates
correct conditions and correct system functioning.
-
2-line x 40-character back-lit dot-matrix Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD).
LCD
1-24
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
1.5
Item
Color
Description
Edit
-
This pushbutton enables you to edit the
parameters on the selected LCD menu. Press
again to exit without saving any changes. Integral
LED lit when functional.
Save
-
This pushbutton enables you to save any modified
parameters on the selected LCD menu. Integral
LED lit when functional.
 Up
 Down
 Left (Back)
 Right (Forward)
-
Navigation pushbuttons for selecting relevant LCD
menu or for incrementing / decrementing selected
parameter values. Integral LED lit when
functional.
Base Units
The SPR1100 Stream Processor is constructed using a screened self-ventilated
modular system. The unit may be operated freestanding or mounted in a 19-inch
rack.
The unit is a flexible platform consisting of a base unit (or chassis) into which up to
six Media Processing Modules (MPMs) can be plugged.
The base unit provides Ethernet control interfaces, and Ethernet data interfaces,
which are accessible at the rear panel. It also provides transport stream processing
functionality. Other functionality, including transcoding, is provided by the Media
Processing Modules.
The base unit provides:

19 inch 1 ‘RU’ rack-mount chassis.

Front panel LCD and keypad for limited control and status reporting.

Front Panel tri-color LED to indicate unit health.

Dual redundant Ethernet control ports.

Two pairs of dual redundant Ethernet ports for data input and output.

Single or dual AC power supply, depending on the model ordered.

Single or dual DC power supply, depending on the model ordered.
Four or six Media Processing Module slots, depending on the model ordered.
Modules are ‘hot swappable’; inserted or removed while the unit is powered.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-25
Introduction
1.6
Rear Panels
The paragraphs below summarize the features of the main models and show the
rear panels.
Details of the rear panel connectors are given in Chapter 2, Installing the
Equipment.
1.6.1
SPR11/CHASSIS/1AC – 1U Unit with Single AC Power Supply
This Ericsson SPR1100 model consists of a base chassis, provides a single AC
power input and enables up to six Media Processing Modules to be fitted.
AC Input
Data Ethernet x4
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 5
Control Ethernet x2
Figure 1.6 SPR11/CHASSIS/1AC Rear Panel – Single AC Input
1.6.2
SPR11/CHASSIS/2AC – 1U Unit with Dual AC Power Supply
This Ericsson SPR1100 model consists of a base chassis, provides dual AC power
inputs and enables up to four Media Processing Modules to be fitted.
Many broadcasting sites have two power supply chains, either from the master
switchboard or, for major sites, from different points on the supply grid. As the most
common cause of system failure is loss of power, feeding the chassis from two
separate chains ensures reliability of supply and, therefore, continuity of service.
Dual AC Inputs
Data Ethernet x4
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 3
Control Ethernet x2
Figure 1.7 SPR11/CHASSIS/2AC Rear Panel – Dual AC Inputs
1-26
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction
1.6.3
SPR11/CHASSIS/1DC – 1U Unit with Single DC Supply
This Ericsson SPR1100 model consists of a base chassis, provides a single DC
power input and enables up to six Media Processing Modules to be fitted.
Data Ethernet x4
DC Input
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 5
Control Ethernet x2
Figure 1.8 SPR11/CHASSIS/1DC Rear Panel – Single DC Input
1.6.4
SPR11/CHASSIS/2DC – 1U Unit with Dual DC Power Supply
This Ericsson SPR1100 model consists of a base chassis, provides a single DC
input and enables up to six Media Processing Modules to be fitted.
Data Ethernet x4
Dual DC Inputs
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 3
Control Ethernet x2
Figure 1.9 SPR11/CHASSIS/2DC Rear Panel – Dual DC Inputs
Table 1.17 Rear Panel Connectors
Item
Type
Description
AC Input
CEE 22/IEC 3-pin male
connector
AC Power Input Connector.
DC Input
AMP Universal MATE-N-LOK
DC Power Input Connector
Data Ethernet
RJ-45 (100/1000BaseT)
Gigabit IP data / feed output on
dual redundant connectors.
Control Ethernet
RJ-45 (100/1000BaseT)
Gigabit IP data / feed output on
dual redundant connectors.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
1-27
Introduction
BLANK
1-28
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
2 Installing the Equipment
Chapter 2
Contents
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.4.1 2.1.4.2 2.1.4.3 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.2.1 2.3.2.2 2.3.2.3 2.3.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.2.1 2.5.2.2 2.5.3 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.7 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Read This First! .................................................................................... 2-3 Handling ............................................................................................... 2-3 Installing the Equipment ....................................................................... 2-3 Lifting .................................................................................................... 2-3 Site Requirements ................................................................................ 2-3 Power Supplies..................................................................................... 2-3 Environment ......................................................................................... 2-3 Lightning Protection.............................................................................. 2-3 Preliminary Checks............................................................................... 2-4 Mechanical Inspection .......................................................................... 2-4 Moving the Equipment Safely ............................................................... 2-4 Installing the Equipment ....................................................................... 2-4 Fixing and Rack Mounting .................................................................... 2-4 Ventilation............................................................................................. 2-5 Openings in the Covers ........................................................................ 2-5 Care in Positioning ............................................................................... 2-6 Protection from Moisture ...................................................................... 2-6 Installing Cables - Safety...................................................................... 2-6 EMC Compliance Statements .............................................................. 2-7 EN 55022/CISPR22.............................................................................. 2-7 FCC ...................................................................................................... 2-7 AC Supply Operation............................................................................ 2-7 AC Power Supply ................................................................................. 2-7 AC Power Supply Cord......................................................................... 2-8 General................................................................................................. 2-8 Wire Colors........................................................................................... 2-8 Connecting the Equipment to the AC Power Supply ............................ 2-9 DC Power Operation ............................................................................ 2-9 DC Power Supply ................................................................................. 2-9 Location of the DC Input Connector ................................................... 2-10 DC Connector Details......................................................................... 2-11 Connection Cable Color Coding ......................................................... 2-11 Connecting the Unit to a DC Power Supply........................................ 2-11 Protective Earth/Technical Earth ........................................................ 2-11 Signal Connections............................................................................. 2-12 General............................................................................................... 2-12 Data Ethernet Connector.................................................................... 2-13 2-1
Installing the Equipment
2.8.3 Control Ethernet Connector................................................................ 2-13 List of Figures
Figure 2.1 Figure 2.2 Figure 2.3 Figure 2.4 Figure 2.5 Figure 2.6 Figure 2.7 Recommended Rack Mount Positioning and Spacing ......................... 2-5 Air-Flow through the Equipment........................................................... 2-5 AC Power Inlet Assembly..................................................................... 2-8 Connector Block for -48 V DC Input ................................................... 2-10 Connector Block for -48 V DC Input (Without Fuse) .......................... 2-10 Position of Technical Earth................................................................. 2-12 Typical SPR1100 Rear Panel (model shown
SPR11/CHASSIS/1AC) ...................................................................... 2-12 List of Tables
Table 2.1 Table 2.2 Table 2.3 Table 2.4 Table 2.5 2-2
Supply Cord Wiring Colors ................................................................... 2-8 Non Standard Supply Cord Wire Colors............................................... 2-9 DC Connector Wire Colors................................................................. 2-11 Data Ethernet Connector.................................................................... 2-13 Control Ethernet Connector................................................................ 2-13 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Installing the Equipment
2.1
Read This First!
2.1.1
Handling
The equipment must be handled and installed carefully and thoughtfully to prevent
safety hazards and damage.
2.1.2
Installing the Equipment
Ensure the personnel designated to fit the unit have the appropriate skills and
knowledge. If in any doubt, contact Ericsson Customer Services (see Preliminary
Pages for contact details).
Installation of the product should follow these instructions, and should only use
installation accessories recommended by the manufacturers. When rack mounted,
this equipment must have shelf supports as well as being fixed at the front panel.
Do not use this product as a support for any other equipment.
2.1.3
Lifting
In some circumstances the unit might be awkward to lift. In which case, do not
attempt to lift or move it without proper assistance or equipment. If in doubt, seek
assistance.
2.1.4
Site Requirements
2.1.4.1
Power Supplies
See Annex B Technical Specification for a full specification.
2.1.4.2
Environment
See Annex B, Technical Specification for a full specification.
Do not install this product in areas of high humidity or where there is danger of water
ingress.
2.1.4.3
Lightning Protection
Warning!
If the unit has been subject to a lightning strike or power surge which has stopped it
working, disconnect the power immediately. Do not re-apply power until it has been
checked for safety. If in doubt, contact Ericsson Customer Services.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
2-3
Installing the Equipment
Where appropriate, ensure this product has an adequate level of lightning
protection. Alternatively, during a lightning storm or when it is left unattended and
unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the supply outlet and disconnect the
output equipment. This prevents damage to the product due to lightning and power
line surges.
2.2
Preliminary Checks
2.2.1
Mechanical Inspection
When taking delivery of a unit check the equipment items delivered against the
enclosed delivery note. Inspect the equipment for damage in transit. If in doubt,
contact Ericsson Customer Services (see Preliminary Pages).
Note:
2.2.2
Do not remove the covers of this equipment as doing so may invalidate any
warranties, cause a safety hazard and/or affect the EMC performance. It
may also invalidate any safety tests. Check with Ericsson Customer
Services beforehand.
Moving the Equipment Safely
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, bracket, or
table. The product may fall, causing serious injury and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, bracket or
table recommended by Ericsson.
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops,
excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart
combination to overturn. Do not move or carry the equipment whilst it is still
connected to the supply or other leads, is live, or is in operation.
2.3
Installing the Equipment
2.3.1
Fixing and Rack Mounting
The equipment is designed for fixed use only and has been shipped with fixing
brackets suitable for a standard 19-inch rack. When installed in a rack, it should be
secured using the fixing brackets. In addition, support shelves must be used to
reduce the weight on the brackets. Ensure it is firmly and safely located and it has
an adequate flow of free-air. Figure 2.1 shows the recommended positioning and
spacing between units to ensure good airflow when multiple units are installed in a
600 x 600 mm rack with free airflow, or an 800 x 800 mm with forced-air cooling.
Slide the unit onto the chassis supports and affix to the rack by means of an M6 x 18
mm panhead screw in each corner.
2-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Installing the Equipment
A freestanding unit should be installed on a secure horizontal surface where it is
unlikely to be knocked or its connectors and leads disturbed.
Figure 2.1 Recommended Rack Mount Positioning and Spacing
2.3.2
Ventilation
2.3.2.1
Openings in the Covers
Side openings in the unit, as well as side-mounted cooling fans, are provided for
ventilation. They ensure reliable operation of the product and protect it from
overheating. The openings of the fans must not be blocked or covered.
Air is released
through vents at
the side of the unit.
Fans are
mounted on
this side of
the unit
Figure 2.2 Air-Flow through the Equipment
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
2-5
Installing the Equipment
2.3.2.2
Care in Positioning
Cautions!
The fans contained within this unit are not fitted with a dust/insect filter. Pay
attention to the environment in which it is to be used.
Do not install units so that the air intake of one aligns with the outlet on another.
Provide baffles and adequate spacing.
The equipment should never be placed near or over a radiator or other source of heat.
It should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a rack unless proper ventilation
is provided and the instructions have been adhered to.
Allow at least 40 mm free air-space at each side of the equipment to ensure
adequate cooling. Racks containing stacked equipment may need to be forced aircooled to reduce the ambient temperature within the rack.
2.3.2.3
Protection from Moisture
Do not install this equipment in areas of high humidity or where there is a danger of
water ingress.
2.3.3
Installing Cables - Safety
Power supply cables should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or
pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular attention to cables at
plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
Warnings!
Do not run AC power cables in the same duct as signal leads. Do not move or install
equipment whilst it is still attached to the mains supply. Ensure safety and ESD
precautions are observed while connecting equipment.
2-6
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Installing the Equipment
2.4
EMC Compliance Statements
2.4.1
EN 55022/CISPR22
1
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the User may be required to take adequate measures.
2.4.2
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the Reference Guide, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the User will be required to
correct the interference at ones own expense.
2.5
AC Supply Operation
An AC power supply is provided with models SPR11/CHASSIS/1AC and
SPR11/CHASSIS/2AC.
2.5.1
AC Power Supply
The equipment operates from a wide-ranging mains power supply (100-240 V AC
50/60 Hz nominal) and is designed for use in ambient air temperature in the range
0C to +50C. There are no links etc. to be altered for operation from different
supply voltages. The full Technical Specification is given in Annex B, Technical
Specification.
Warnings!
The SPR1100 Stream Processor should only be operated from the type of power
source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type to your
business, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. Do not overload
wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
The SPR1100 Stream Processor is NOT fitted with an AC power ON/OFF switch.
Ensure the supply socket outlet is installed or located near the equipment so that it
is accessible.
1
The EMC information was correct at the time of manufacture.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
2-7
Installing the Equipment
AC Mains Inlet
Fuse Carrier
Figure 2.3 AC Power Inlet Assembly
Note:
See Annex B, Technical Specification for fuse information.
2.5.2
AC Power Supply Cord
2.5.2.1
General
A two-meter mains supply cord is supplied with this product. It is fitted with a molded
plug suitable for the USA, UK or mainland Europe as advised at the time of ordering.
Note:
2.5.2.2
The equipment is not fitted with an AC power supply ON/OFF switch.
Ensure the socket-outlet supplying the equipment is installed near the
equipment so that it is easily accessible.
Wire Colors
The wires in the supply cord are colored as shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Earth:
Neutral:
Live:
Supply Cord Wiring Colors
UK
(BS 1363)
EUROPE
(CEE 7/7)
USA
(NEMA 5-15P)
Green-and-yellow
Green-and-yellow
Green
Blue
Blue
White
Brown
Brown
Black
If the colors do not correspond with the colored markings identifying the terminals in
a locally supplied plug, proceed as in Annex B. The inclusion of Table 2.2 is for
reference.
2-8
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.2
2.5.3
Non Standard Supply Cord Wire Colors
Wire Color (UK)
Action
green-and-yellow
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter E or the safety earth symbol
or colored green or
green-and-yellow.
blue
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter N or colored black.
brown
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter L or colored red.
Connecting the Equipment to the AC Power Supply
As there is no mains power switch fitted to this unit, ensure the local ac power
supply is switched OFF before connecting the supply cord.
Connect the mains lead to the equipment and then to the local supply.
2.6
DC Power Operation
A –48 V DC power supply is provided with models SPR11/CHASSIS/1DC and
SPR11/CHASSIS/2DC.
2.6.1
DC Power Supply
Cautions!
This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the
marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your business,
consult a qualified electrical engineer.
This equipment is Class 1 and must have a protective earth.
This product uses a –48 V DC power supply source (see Annex B, Technical
Specification) for a full power supply specification.
This equipment may be fitted with either a connector that has an integral fuse with
wiring terminals (see Figure 2.4) or a dedicated 3-pin connector without a fuse
(see Figure 2.5). For both types of connector, for protection of the DC wiring, a
circuit breaker of maximum 16 A is recommended.
For wiring DC power, a minimum wire size of 1.0 mm2 (17AWG) is recommended.
This may need to be increased for longer cable runs.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
2-9
Installing the Equipment
2.6.2
Location of the DC Input Connector
The connector is located at the right-hand rear of the equipment.
Warning!
The –48 V DC unit is not fitted with an ON/OFF switch. Ensure that the supply has a
suitable means of isolation that is easily accessible. Failure to isolate the equipment
properly may cause a safety hazard.
Equipment Side
—
+
Fuse Carrier
Fuse
Connector Block
Connector Block
—48 V
0V
Supply Side
Figure 2.4 Connector Block for -48 V DC Input
In the connector, shown above, the equipment fuse is held in an integral fuse carrier
at the DC power inlet at the rear of the unit. See Annex B, Technical Specification
for DC fuse information.
+
Figure 2.5 Connector Block for -48 V DC Input (Without Fuse)
2-10
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Installing the Equipment
2.6.3
DC Connector Details
For connection to the –48 V input connector (shown in Figure 2.4) the following
parts from AMP or Molex should be used:
AMP Universal MATE-N-LOK
Housing: AMP no. 1-480700-0
Female terminal (3 needed per housing): AMP no. 926901-1
Molex MLX
Housing: Molex no. 50-84-1030
Female terminal (3 needed per housing): Molex no. 02-08-1002
2.6.4
Connection Cable Color Coding
The DC input cable supplied with the product is color coded in accordance with the
following.
Table 2.3 DC Connector Wire Colors
2.6.5
Earth
Green-and-yellow
–48 V
Blue
0V
Brown
Connecting the Unit to a DC Power Supply
Note:
This equipment is not intended for direct connection to centralized DC
power systems in the USA or Canada.
Connect the SPR1100 to the local DC power supply as follows.
1. Local DC Power Supply - Ensure the local DC supply is isolated.
2. SPR1100 - Ensure circuit protection of a suitable value (e.g. a fuse) is fitted to
the product supply wiring.
3. Supply Cord - Connect the DC lead to the unit input connector and then to the
local DC power supply. Switch on the DC power supply.
2.7
Protective Earth/Technical Earth
Warnings!
This unit must be correctly earthed through the molded plug supplied; if the local
mains supply does not have an earth conductor do not connect the unit. Contact
Ericsson Customer Services for advice.
Before connecting the unit to the supply, check the supply requirements in Annex B.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
2-11
Installing the Equipment
The terminal marked at the rear panel is a Technical Earth. Its use is
recommended. This is NOT a protective earth for electric shock protection. The
terminal is provided to:
1. Ensure all equipment chassis fixed within a rack are at the same technical earth
potential.
2. Eliminate the migration of stray charges when connecting between equipment.
To do this, connect a wire between the Technical Earth terminal and a suitable
point on the rack.
The Technical Earth provides a suitable connection between the equipment and the
installation to give a low impedance path at normal operating frequencies.
Technical Earth
Figure 2.6 Position of Technical Earth
2.8
Signal Connections
2.8.1
General
Caution!
It is strongly recommended that the terminal marked at the rear panel of the
equipment is connected to a site Technical Earth before any external connections
are made and the equipment is powered. This limits the migration of stray charges.
AC Input
Data Ethernet (x4)
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 5
Control Ethernet x2
Figure 2.7 Typical SPR1100 Rear Panel (model shown SPR11/CHASSIS/1AC)
2-12
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Installing the Equipment
2.8.2
Data Ethernet Connector
The unit has four Ethernet ports - two for data input, and
two for data output and will respond to ARPs, pings and
other low-level Ethernet traffic. The ports are accessible
via RJ-45 connectors on the rear panel of the chassis.
These are labeled Ge 1, Ge 2, Ge 3 and Ge 4. Ge 1 and
Ge 2 are used for data input, while Ge 3 and Ge 4 are
data output.
Table 2.4
Data Ethernet Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
RJ-45 (100/1000BaseT)
Connector designation
Ge 1 /2
Pin outs
Pin 1 - Tx Out(+)
(Unused pins are not
connected)
Pin 2 - TX Out (-)
Ge 3 /4
Pin 3 - Rx In (+)
Pin 6 - RX Out (-)
2.8.3
Control Ethernet Connector
The Ethernet control ports are used to connect the
equipment to a PC for access with a web browser.
Both connectors share the same IP address, Ctrl 1 is the
Primary control port, and is by default the active control
port. Control Port Ctrl 2 should be considered as the
secondary control network as it will not respond to the
Control Port IP Address unless control has been passed
to it either as a result of a redundancy switch, or via a
user command. The active control port switches when
Ctrl 1 has no link (e.g. carrier), and Ctrl 2 has the link.
Table 2.5
Control Ethernet Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
RJ-45 (100/1000BaseT)
Connector designation
Ctl 1/2
Pin outs
Pin 1 - Tx Out(+)
(Unused pins are not
connected)
Pin 2 - TX Out (-)
Pin 3 - Rx In (+)
Pin 6 - RX Out (-)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
2-13
Installing the Equipment
BLANK
2-14
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
3
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Contents
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.12.1 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 Introduction........................................................................................... 3-3 How to Connect Up the Unit ................................................................. 3-3 How to Power Up the Unit .................................................................... 3-4 How to Set the Unit IP Address ............................................................ 3-4 How to Import Multiple Transport Streams/Input Services ................... 3-6 How to Create/Add a Transport Stream/Input Service ......................... 3-7 How to Create an Output Service ......................................................... 3-8 How to Set Up Reflex on an Output Transport Stream ...................... 3-11 How to Change Settings across Multiple Profiles and/or Services ..... 3-12 How to Make a Secondary Input ........................................................ 3-12 How to Configure Manual Redundancy .............................................. 3-13 How to Configure a 1+1 Redundant System ...................................... 3-14 Recommendations for 1 + 1 Redundancy .......................................... 3-15 How to Apply or Discard Configuration Changes ............................... 3-17 How to Save and Restore Your Configurations .................................. 3-19 How to Manage Your Resources........................................................ 3-20 How to Determine the State of the Unit .............................................. 3-20 How to Monitor Alarms ....................................................................... 3-21 List of Figures
Figure 3.1 SPR1100 Connections ......................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.2 Import Transport Streams Menu Option ............................................... 3-6
Figure 3.3 Import Transport Streams Pop-Up Window.......................................... 3-6
Figure 3.4 Add Transport Streams Menu Option ................................................... 3-7
Figure 3.5 Transport Streams Settings .................................................................. 3-7
Figure 3.6 Input Service and Profiles..................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3.7 Specifying an Output Service ............................................................... 3-9
Figure 3.8 Specifying Input Video Format ........................................................... 3-10
Figure 3.9 Specifying Service and Profile Properties .......................................... 3-10
Figure 3.10 Make Selected as Secondary ............................................................. 3-13
Figure 3.11 Host Input Pane showing Activate Window ........................................ 3-14
Figure 3.12 1 + 1 Redundancy Configuration ........................................................ 3-15
Figure 3.13 Property Changes Highlighted in Orange ........................................... 3-17
Figure 3.14 Changes Listed in the Information Pane ............................................ 3-18
Figure 3.15 Apply All and Discard All Buttons ....................................................... 3-18
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
3-1
Getting Started
Figure 3.16 Apply All and Discard All Buttons ....................................................... 3-18
Figure 3.17 Save Configuration to File .................................................................. 3-19
Figure 3.18 Restore Standard Configuration from File.......................................... 3-19
Figure 3.19 Allocation of Resources...................................................................... 3-20
Figure 3.20 Configuration Report .......................................................................... 3-21
Figure 3.21 Current Alarm List .............................................................................. 3-22
List of Tables
Table 3.1 IP Address Restrictions ........................................................................ 3-5
3-2
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Getting Started
3.1
Introduction
Due to the number of different ways the SPR1100 can be used, it is impossible to
give precise setting up instructions for every possible working scenario. This
chapter, therefore, gives general guidance and principles on how to power up and
set up your unit for operation and describes the more common operations you will
want to perform.
For details of all Front Panel menus and controls, see Chapter 4, Front Panel
Control. For details of all Web Graphical User Interface (GUI) menus and controls,
see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control.
For more information on possible networking scenarios, see Chapter 6, Stream
Processing and Networking.
3.2
How to Connect Up the Unit
See Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment for all connector details.
Figure 3.1 SPR1100 Connections
To connect up the unit(s):
1. Connect signal input connectors Ge 1 and Ge 2 (for your input Transport
Streams) to your local area network.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
3-3
Getting Started
2. Connect signal output connectors Ge 3 and Ge 4 (for your transcoded output
Transport Streams) to your local area network.
3. Connect computer control connectors CTL 1 and CTL 2 (for Web GUI Control) to
your local area network. Both connectors share the same IP address, Ctrl 1 is
the Primary control port, and is by default the active control port. Control Port
Ctrl 2 should be considered as the secondary control network as it will not
respond to the Control Port IP Address unless control has been passed to it
either as a result of a redundancy switch, or via a user command. The active
control port switches when Ctrl 1 has no link (e.g. carrier), and Ctrl 2 has the
link.
4. Connect AC power connector, depending on the option purchased, to the power
supply.
3.3
How to Power Up the Unit
To power up the unit(s):
1. With all signal and power cables connected as required, switch on the AC
power supply, depending on the model, to the unit at the wall or rack outlet.
2. Wait for unit initialisation to complete (approximately 1.5 minutes, depending on
the number of options fitted in the unit).
Caution!
This equipment should not be operated unless the cooling fans are working and
there is free-air flow around the unit.
Note:
3.4
The SPR1100 Stream Processor does NOT contain a power on/off switch.
How to Set the Unit IP Address
Setting the IP address of a unit is accomplished using the front panel menus. For a
full description of these menus, see Chapter 4, Front Panel Control.
To set the IP address of the unit(s):
1. On the SPR1100 front panel, press the  (Forward) pushbutton until the current
IP address is displayed. Press the Edit key and then use the  (Up),  (Down),
 (Forward) and  (Back) keys to enter the IP address.
Note:
The  (Forward) and  (Back) keys move the cursor between characters
and the  (Up) and  (Down) keys increase/decrease the number selected
by the cursor. A key is illuminated when there is functionality available. If a
key is not illuminated, pressing it will have no effect.
2. Press the Save button to store the new IP address.
3-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Getting Started
3. Continue and set the subnet mask and gateway address in the same way, if
required, using the front panel keys as described above to modify each
parameter.
IP Addresses on the unit must adhere to RFC3330 range of restrictions as listed in
the following table of allocated IP addresses.
Table 3.1 IP Address Restrictions
Block
Present Use
Reference
0.0.0.0/8
This Network
[RFC1700, p4]
10.0.0.0/8
Private-Use Networks
[RFC1918]
14.0.0.0/8
Public-Data Networks
[RFC1700, p181]
24.0.0.0/8
Cable Television Networks
---
39.0.0.0/8
Reserved but subject to allocation
[RFC1797]
127.0.0.0/8
Loopback
[RFC1700, p5]
128.0.0.0/16
Reserved but subject to allocation
---
169.254.0.0/16
Link Local
---
172.16.0.0/12
Private-Use Networks
[RFC1918]
191.255.0.0/16
Reserved but subject to allocation
---
192.0.0.0/24
Reserved but subject to allocation
---
192.0.2.0/24
Test-Net
---
192.88.99.0/24
6 to 4 Relay Anycast
[RFC3068]
192.168.0.0/16
Private-Use Networks
[RFC1918]
198.18.0.0/15
Network Interconnect Unit Benchmark Testing
[RFC2544]
223.255.255.0/24
Reserved but subject to allocation
---
224.0.0.0/4
Multicast
[RFC3171]
240.0.0.0/4
Reserved for Future Use
[RFC1700, p4]
Note:
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
The control network and data networks should not conflict. It is suggested
that the ranges for these networks are in the Private-Use Networks as listed
in the summary Table. IP Address range 192.168.10.x (subnet
255.255.255.0) is used for internal unit communications, so should not be
used for external communications.
3-5
Getting Started
3.5
How to Import Multiple Transport Streams/Input Services
The unit is configured using the web browser Graphical User Interface (GUI). For
details of all the GUI screens and options, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control.
If you have the details of multiple Transport Streams available as a spreadsheet
(.xls) or a text file (.txt), you can quickly populate your unit with this information. See
Chapter 1, Introduction for a list of the supported transcoding permutations.
To import multiple Transport Streams/Input Services:
1. Navigate to the Configure > Services screen of the web GUI.
2. Right-click on the Host Inputs icon and select the Import Transport Streams
option from the displayed drop-down menu.
Figure 3.2 Import Transport Streams Menu Option
3. A dialog will be displayed enabling you to download a template, either as a
spreadsheet (.xls) or a text file (.txt).
Figure 3.3 Import Transport Streams Pop-Up Window
3-6
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Getting Started
4. This template can be edited on your computer to incorporate the streams
desired. When editing is complete, the data can be pasted back into the pop-up
window. Ensure that the TAB characters are preserved in the data during
this process.
5. Click the OK button to transfer the data to the Inputs panel or click Cancel to
abort the operation. If the Auto Save box is checked, the SPR1100 will be
updated immediately on import.
3.6
How to Create/Add a Transport Stream/Input Service
In order to use the SPR1100 you will need a minimum of one Transport Stream and
will need to define an Input Service and associated profiles. If you don’t have your
Transport Stream details saved as a file to be downloaded (described above), you
will need to set them up individually.
To set up/add a Transport Stream/Input Service:
1. Navigate to the Configure > Services screen on the web GUI.
2. On the Input pane Action menu, highlight Physical Data Interface 1 and select
Add Transport Stream. This will create a new input stream.
Figure 3.4 Add Transport Streams Menu Option
3. Enter the IP details in the Properties pane of the Transport Stream accordion
and click Apply All button.
Figure 3.5 Transport Streams Settings
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
3-7
Getting Started
4. The unit will now attempt to acquire the Transport Stream on that IP address
(either multicast or unicast). It may take up to 30 s to properly acquire all
services and components within the Transport Stream.
5. When acquired, the Input Service will be displayed in the Inputs pane. Click to
expand the list and view the associated video, audio and data Profiles.
Figure 3.6 Input Service and Profiles
3.7
How to Create an Output Service
When you have set up your Input Services you will need to set up the corresponding
Output Services, which may or may not contain the same Profiles. To enable you to
do this quickly, the SPR1100 supports drag-and-drop operation between the Input
and Output panes.
To set up an Output Service:
1. From the Configure > Services screen on the web GUI, select and drag an
Input Service to the Output pane. A dialog will be displayed.
3-8
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Getting Started
Figure 3.7 Specifying an Output Service
2. Enter the details of the Output Service, as required, in the Output Multicast
Selection dialog. This will create an output service with the default set of profiles:
a
Specify whether to create a single output multicast, or a separate multicast
or each service.
b
If you select single output multicast, by default a Reflex group is created
and all the services are created within this Reflex group. The maximum
number of services in a single Reflex group is 24. Uncheck the Add to a
Reflex Group box if you do not want a Reflex group created. You can
create the group later, if desired.
c
Create an output multicast for each service by entering the relevant IP
settings for the output streams.
d
Create audio components as required.
e
Click the OK button to accept the new settings or click Cancel to abort the
operation.
3. You can now edit the service and component Profiles using the Properties pane,
described in Chapter 5 Web GUI Control. Remember that any settings that you
edit in the Properties pane will not be sent to the unit and activated until you
click the Apply All button.
4. Important: the input video format (HD or SD) is NOT detected automatically;
therefore, you MUST manually select the correct video input format in the Input
tab of the Video Reflex Component accordion.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
3-9
Getting Started
Figure 3.8 Specifying Input Video Format
5. The service and profile properties may now be specified using the Service
Properties tab on the Service accordion.
Figure 3.9 Specifying Service and Profile Properties
3-10
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Getting Started
3.8
How to Set Up Reflex on an Output Transport Stream
About Reflex
Reflex is the statistical multiplexing system provided by Ericsson. Reflex on the
SPR1100 operates completely within the unit and does not require an external
controller. A single output Transport Stream can be configured so that each service
varies its bit rate dynamically according to the complexity of the video frames.
Reflex works on a group of components (called a Reflex group), and monitors the bit
rate demand of each component within the group on a frame-by-frame basis. It
automatically adjusts the bit rate allocated to each component to ensure that the
picture quality is optimized.
The ability to create output Reflex groups does not depend on the whether the input
service was originally part of a reflex group – both CBR video and VBR video input
elementary streams can be converted to Reflex at the output.
The following limitations apply:

Maximum number of Reflex groups per SPR1100: 18

Maximum number of services per Reflex group: 24

Maximum number of output services across all groups: 72 (SD) OR 24 (HD).
A Reflex group can use the available bit rate within a Transport Stream, or it can
have a manually set bit rate. Either way, the sum of the bit rates of the components
within the group cannot exceed the Reflex group bit rate
Reflex does not require an external control entity for correct operation. As a tradeoff, Reflex can only control the bit rates of internally generated components.
Reflex requires a valid SPR/SWO/IREFLEX license for each reflex group that is
created.
Creating Reflex Support
You can set up a Reflex Group when you initially create the output (see section 3.7
How to Create an Output Service), or subsequently, by manually creating the Reflex
group on an empty output Transport Stream and manually dragging services into it.
Setting up Reflex Group Parameters
Once all the components to be statistically multiplexed are added to the Reflex
group, you can set up the group parameters.
To set up the Reflex Group parameters:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Reflex group you want to set up.
2. In the Properties widget, set a name for the group in the Group Name field.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
3-11
Getting Started
3. For seamless buffer delay, specify the Video Delay your application can
tolerate.
See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for details of the Properties widget.
3.9
How to Change Settings across Multiple Profiles and/or
Services
This is useful when you want to change a single setting, e.g. Audio bit rate, and
want it to affect some, or all, current output services.
In general, changing a setting in the properties pane will apply to all entities at or
below the current selection in the Outputs pane. This is best illustrated by an
example.
Examples:
To change the audio bit rate for all your output services:
1. On the Configure > Services screen, select the IP Output Data Port in the
Outputs pane.
2. Select the Audio Component accordion. Notice that the bottom of the
Properties pane states how many audio components this will actually apply to.
3. Select the Encode tab and change the bit rate.
4. Click Apply All to set the bit rate across all your Output Services.
A similar effect can be achieved by using Ctrl-click to select multiple entities in the
Outputs pane, e.g. to change the video bit rate of all your 1280x720 profiles.
1. Expand all your services in the Outputs pane.
2. Hold Ctrl key down and highlight all the 1280x720 profiles.
3. Expand the Video Component tab in the Properties pane.
4. Select the Encode tab and set the bit rate.
5. Click Apply All to set the bit rate across all your selected profiles.
3.10
How to Make a Secondary Input
This is used when you want to make one of the inputs a Secondary (backup) for a
particular Primary input. This Secondary multicast input can be on the same
physical data interface or on the other physical data interface. Once this has been
set up then if the Primary TS fails then the Secondary will be switched into its place.
Note:
3-12
This is only useful if the Secondary has exactly the same line up of services
as in the Primary.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Getting Started
To make a Secondary Input:
1. From the Configure > Services page and click the Host Inputs icon in the
Inputs pane.
2. Tick the Select checkbox of the required Transport Stream.
3. Right-click on the Transport Stream to display a context menu and select the
Make Selected As Secondary option.
Figure 3.10 Make Selected as Secondary
3.11
How to Configure Manual Redundancy
This is useful when if you want to move to your Secondary input because you are
going to intentionally disrupt/remove the Primary input for planned maintenance, rerouting etc. You may also use this facility to test that your Secondary system is
working correctly.
Note:
These actions are normally performed during a maintenance window.
A manual switch between the Primary and Secondary can be selected by right
clicking on the Secondary stream, and selecting Activate. Secondaries may only be
activated if they contain services used in current transcode operations.
Note:
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
This function takes effect immediately. The Apply All button is not required.
3-13
Getting Started
Figure 3.11 Host Input Pane showing Activate Window
Similarly, the Primary/Secondary roles can be swapped over by right-clicking either
multicast and selecting Swap.
3.12
How to Configure a 1+1 Redundant System
A 1+1 system consists of a Primary unit and a Secondary unit.
Note:
It is not possible to turn a Primary unit into a Secondary unit (nor vice
versa). At any one time, one unit will be the Active unit and one unit will be
the Passive unit
In a 1 +1 Redundant System, automatic redundancy from the active to the passive
unit is triggered by loss of Transport Stream lock or failure of the active unit. When a
switch to the passive unit has taken place this unit will remain active even if the fault
is cleared on the other unit. A manual revert is possible by right clicking on the
primary stream and clicking Activate.
Note:
An automatic revert is not possible.
To add a Secondary unit to a Standalone Configuration:
1. Create a backup of the Primary configuration settings just in case anything goes
wrong. This can be done by clicking on Configure > Save-Load, then right click
on the link to save the configuration.
2. Ensure that the Secondary is disconnected from the network, and apply power
to the Secondary unit.
3. Configure the control IP address for the secondary unit using the front panel.
4. Connect the Secondary to the control network. Do not connect the data
networks at this point.
5. Open the Web GUI for the Secondary unit and configure the remaining network
settings (control, data input and data output).
6. On the Secondary Web GUI click Configure > System > Standalone 1 + 1
Redundancy. Enter the control IP address of the Primary in the Peer IP
Address setting and click Apply Changes, then OK on the popup dialog.
3-14
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Getting Started
Figure 3.12 1 + 1 Redundancy Configuration
7. Open the Web GUI for the Primary unit and click Configure > System >
Standalone 1 + 1 Redundancy. Enter the control IP address of the Secondary
in the Peer IP Address setting, select Primary as the Unit Role and click Apply
Changes, then OK on the popup dialog.
8. On the Primary unit Web GUI click Set Primary Active, then OK on the popup
dialog.
9. On the Primary unit Web GUI click Manual Configuration Copy From Primary
to Secondary, then OK on the popup dialog.
10. On the Primary unit Web GUI click Configure > System > MGP Support. Set
MGP Mode to On, click Apply Changes, then OK on the popup dialog.
11. Wait for 60 seconds for the units to stabilize.
12. As a final check, click on the Configure on the Secondary Web GUI. The
services configuration will be displayed. Compare this with the services
configuration of the primary and make sure they are the same.
13. Connect the data networks to the Secondary unit.
3.12.1
Recommendations for 1 + 1 Redundancy
Enable MGP
It is possible for the 1 + 1 Redundancy system to have both units Active. This can
happen if the control connection between the units fails. In this case the Secondary
thinks the Primary has failed, and becomes Active. This could cause duplicate
multicast packets on the output data network. To prevent this it is recommended that
Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP) is always enabled in a 1 + 1 Redundancy system.
To enable MGP, open the Web GUI and click Configure > System > MGP
Support. Set MGP Mode to On, click Apply Changes, then OK on the popup
dialog.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
3-15
Getting Started
Use SNTP to Synchronize Time
It is recommended that SNTP is used to ensure that the system clock on each unit
reports the same time. This can be configured from the Web GUI by clicking
Configure > Unit Info and setting the SNTP Server setting.
Beware of Changing the Unit State (setmode)
When redundancy switching is performed (either manual or automatic), the Unit
State (setmode) may be changed, overriding any manual change to this
configuration.
If you need to manually adjust this setting it is recommended that you set the 1 + 1
Redundancy Availability setting to Unavailable on both units prior to making any
change. This will prevent the 1 + 1 Redundancy system from performing an
automatic redundancy switch.
Resolving Configuration Mismatch Alarm
The configuration mismatch alarm indicates that the configuration on the 2 units may
not be identical. This alarm is triggered if a configuration change is made on one unit
whilst the other unit is not contactable. It is also triggered if the pairing process is
unable to work out which unit should be Active. In this situation the user should
manually decide which unit has the most up to date configuration.
The Last Updated value may be useful to determine this, however since
communication was lost, this may not reflect the correct value for the other unit. You
should check the Primary Last Updated time using the Primary Web GUI and the
Secondary Last Updated time on the Secondary Web GUI.
When you have decided which unit has the correct configuration, you should use the
corresponding button on the GUI to copy the configuration from that unit to the other
unit. This will clear the alarm.
Resolving Conflicting Status Alarm
This alarm indicates that the pairing process was not able to determine which unit
should be active and which unit should be passive. When this alarm is raised either
both units will be Active or both units will be Passive.
Firstly you should resolve the Configuration Mismatch alarm (this will always
accompany the Conflicting Status alarm).
If both units are Passive:

If there are no problems with the Primary unit, you should use the Web GUI to
make the Primary unit active.

Otherwise use the Web GUI to make the Secondary unit active. Repair the
Primary and switch back to is as soon as possible.
If both units are Active, and assuming that you have MGP enabled, MGP will decide
which unit is actually broadcasting and suppress the data output of the other unit.
3-16
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Getting Started
You should determine which unit is actually broadcasting and make that the Active
unit. To do this, open the Web GUI for each unit (in separate browser tabs/windows)
and click Configure > System > MGP Support on each Web GUI.
Observe the value of Unit Level MGP State on each unit. One of the units will show
R1 On air. Use the web GUI to make this unit the Active unit. If you have just made
the Secondary the Active unit, you should switch back to the Primary when it will
cause the least disruption to your broadcasting services.
3.13
How to Apply or Discard Configuration Changes
All modifications to a configuration initially only appear in the GUI. All changes made
to Service and Profile properties are highlighted as orange text to enable you to see
the changes at a glance.
Figure 3.13 Property Changes Highlighted in Orange
All changes you have made are listed at the bottom of the screen in the Information
Pane. These entries are linked so that by clicking on them the Properties pane will
also display the relevant changes.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
3-17
Getting Started
Figure 3.14 Changes Listed in the Information Pane
The unit does not accept any changes to the properties until the Apply All button is
clicked.
Figure 3.15 Apply All and Discard All Buttons
Note:
Changing the configuration may cause output glitching. This is kept to a
minimum; transcoder units which do not need reconfiguration will not be
interrupted. Additionally, changing the output bit rate will not cause a glitch.
Clicking the Discard All button displays a confirmation dialog box and abandons
any changes you have made when you confirm by clicking the Yes button.
Figure 3.16 Apply All and Discard All Buttons
3-18
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Getting Started
3.14
How to Save and Restore Your Configurations
We recommend that you save your configurations regularly, as an XML file,
particularly when changes have been made. This can then be used to archive your
settings for Transport Streams, Services and Profiles, in order that you can upload
them in the event that your settings have been changed or lost, or to quickly load
another machine with an identical configuration. See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control
for full details of this page.
The parameters associated with each Media Processing Module slot are stored, so
that if a module is removed, and then a module of the same type is plugged in to the
slot, the system will attempt to apply the previous configuration for the module in
that slot.
To save your configuration:
1. Navigate to the Configure > Save-Load web GUI page.
2. In the Save Configuration to File section, right click on the Right Click to
Save Current Configuration link.
Figure 3.17 Save Configuration to File
3. Select Save target as… or similar (depending on the browser you are using) in
the displayed dialog.
4. You will then be prompted for a file name and a location to save your file.
To restore an XML configuration file:
1. Navigate to the Configure > Save-Load web GUI page.
2. In the Restore Standard Confirmation from File section, click on the Browse
button to locate the XML file.
Figure 3.18 Restore Standard Configuration from File
3. Click the Upload button to upload the file to your unit.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
3-19
Getting Started
4. The uploaded configuration will be actioned immediately, when completed,
provided that the file is valid. In the event of an invalid file being uploaded, none
of the unit settings will be changed.
3.15
How to Manage Your Resources
With the number of complex transcode configurations possible with the SPR1100, it
is easy to lose track of how much of the unit's resource has been used. To help
manage this, a tabbed graphical display area in the Modules pane on the right-hand
side of the Configure > Services screen displays the amount of resource allocated
or available for the configuration. See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for full details of
this page.
Figure 3.19 Allocation of Resources
Three tabs are provided: Overview, Services and Details which display the
allocated/available breakdown for each transcode type. By hovering over the
graphics on each of the tabbed pages, further details are displayed.
3.16
How to Determine the State of the Unit
When the Ericsson SPR1100 has been configured, the current state of the unit can
be determined from the Configure > Config Report page. See Chapter 5, Web GUI
Control for full details of this page.
3-20
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Getting Started
Figure 3.20 Configuration Report
The initial view shows each component of each service. The report indicates all
known data about the component, and also to which card (MPM) and encode engine
the component has been allocated.
The drop-down boxes towards the top of the form enable you to filter which items to
view. In this way, particular components can be found rapidly and accurately,
enabling stream faults to be found with ease.
3.17
How to Monitor Alarms
Front Panel Summary Alarm Indicator
A front panel LED on the SPR1100 unit provides a summary alarm indicator. See
Chapter 1, Introduction for full details.
Front Panel LCD Alarms
The front panel LCD on the SPR1100 unit provides summary and detailed alarm
indications. See Chapter 4, Front Panel Control for full details.
Web GUI Configuration Warnings and Errors
The Information pane at the bottom of the Configure > Services page displays
Warnings and Errors, (and Change History) when you are trying to set up or edit
your configuration. The entries here will alert you to operations that cannot be
carried out or when you are attempting operations that will result in loss of service.
See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for full details of the Information pane.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
3-21
Getting Started
Web GUI Status and Alarm Monitoring Buttons
On the right-hand side of the web GUI, Status and Alarm monitoring buttons are
provided:

Standalone - This colored button indicates the redundancy status of the unit:
either Red (FAIL) or Green (OK). When clicked, further details are displayed in a
pop-up dialog. Click the OK button to close the dialog.

Alarm – This colored button indicates the current alarm state: Red (CRITICAL
FAILURE), Amber (ERRORS) or Green (OK). When clicked, a pop-up dialog
shows details of the most recent critical alarm. Click the OK button to close the
dialog.
See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for full details of the status and alarm monitoring
buttons.
Web GUI Alarms Page
The alarms status of the SPR1100 can be monitored from the Alarms tab web
page, which lists alarms as Red (Critical), Orange (Major) or Yellow (Minor).
Further tabs can be selected from this top level tab, which show the Current alarms,
History alarms and a facility which allows the user to Set Masks or severity levels
for individual alarms.
Figure 3.21 Current Alarm List
See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for full details of the Alarms tab.
See Chapter 8, Preventative Maintenance and Fault-finding for a description of the
fault and alarm scenarios.
See Annex E, Alarm Lists for a list of the possible alarm messages.
3-22
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
4
Front Panel Control
Chapter 4
Contents
4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.3.1 4.3.3.2 4.3.3.3 4.3.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4.1 4.3.5 4.3.5.1 4.3.6 4.3.6.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 4-3 Using the Front Panel Controls ............................................................ 4-3 USB Connector..................................................................................... 4-3 Status LED ........................................................................................... 4-3 LCD ...................................................................................................... 4-4 Arrow Pushbuttons (Up, Down, Left, Right).......................................... 4-4 Edit and Save Pushbuttons .................................................................. 4-4 Front Panel Menus ............................................................................... 4-5 Top-Level Menu.................................................................................... 4-6 System Menu........................................................................................ 4-6 System > Remote Control .................................................................... 4-6 System > Remote Control > IP Address............................................... 4-6 System > Remote Control > Subnet Mask ........................................... 4-6 System > Remote Control > Gateway Address .................................... 4-7 System > Remote Control > Default MAC Address.............................. 4-7 System > Alarms .................................................................................. 4-7 System > Alarms > (Detail)................................................................... 4-8 System > Versions................................................................................ 4-8 System > Versions > Software Versions .............................................. 4-8 System > HW Config ............................................................................ 4-8 System > HW Config > Accept Option Slot Conf.................................. 4-9 List of Figures
Figure 4.1 SPR1100 Front Panel........................................................................... 4-3 List of Tables
Table 4.1 Front Panel Menus ............................................................................... 4-5 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
4-1
Front Panel Control
BLANK
4-2
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Front Panel Control
4.1
Introduction
This chapter describes the features and options provided by the Front Panel menus
for controlling the SPR1100 Stream Processor locally.
Note:
4.2
After powering up (see Chapter 3, Getting started), wait for initialization to
complete (approximately 1.5 to 3 minutes, depending on the number of
options fitted in the chassis) before attempting to use the front panel menus
and controls.
Using the Front Panel Controls
The user interface for the Front Panel consists of an alphanumeric Liquid Crystal
Display, pushbuttons, and a status LED that are used to set-up, control and monitor
the unit.
Various menu screens can be navigated on the LCD using the pushbuttons, which
enable you to select and modify key parameters and features of the unit.
Status LED
LCD
USB
Edit
Left
Save
Up
Right
Down
Figure 4.1 SPR1100 Front Panel
4.2.1
USB Connector
This connector is for factory / service use only.
4.2.2
Status LED
This multi-colored LED provides a visual indication of the summary status of the
unit. The LED can be any one of three colors:

Red (Fault). Indicates a fault condition, e.g. a missing or faulty input signal,
although it may be lit briefly during power up.

Amber (Locked / Non-Functional) Indicates that the unit is locked to a
Transport Stream, but also indicates incorrect conditions or incorrect system
functioning.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
4-3
Front Panel Control

4.2.3
Green (Locked / Functional) Indicates that the unit is locked to a Transport
Stream and also indicates correct conditions and correct system functioning.
There are no active alarms or active alarms or warnings are masked.
LCD
A 2-line x 40-character back-lit dot-matrix Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) displays
various menus and settings. The menus and setting available will vary depending on
which options have been enabled through the purchase of a suitable license.
See Table 4.1 for details of all menus.
The SPR1100 has one main category of menu called the System Menu.
4.2.4
Arrow Pushbuttons (Up, Down, Left, Right)
Four arrow pushbuttons (or keys) are used to navigate through the front panel LCD
menus. Each arrow pushbutton is backlit by an integral LED when active, indicating
that a further choice or action is available by pressing that pushbutton.
 = Up
 = Down
4.2.5

= Left (Back)

= Right (Forward)
Edit and Save Pushbuttons
The Edit and Save pushbuttons (or keys) are used to modify and store user settings
within the selected menu. The Edit pushbutton is backlit by an integral LED when
the current menu contains an editable setting. The Save pushbutton is backlit by an
integral LED when a change has been made that requires saving.
To edit a user setting within the selected menu:
1. Press the Edit key. A cursor appears (flashes) on the first line of the display.
2. If a numerical value is to be entered, use the  (Back) and  (Forward) keys to
move the cursor along the line and select each digit in turn, and use the  (Up)
and  (Down) keys to increment or decrement the digit.
3. If a non-numerical (mode or feature) menu item is to be selected, simply change
the selection using the  (Up) and  (Down) keys.
4. Press Save to save the new setting or press Edit to abandon the operation and
return to the original setting.
4-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Front Panel Control
4.3
Front Panel Menus
An overview of the Front Panel menus is shown in Table 4.1. The menus and
settings available will vary depending on which receiver model is being used and
which options have been enabled through the purchase of a suitable license.
Table 4.1
Front Panel Menus
Description
Top Level Menu Menu Level 2
Menu Level 3
Menu Level 4
To navigate to
the next level of
menus press
the right arrow
key.
Use the up and
down arrow keys to
move between these
menus.
Use the right arrow
key and then the up
and down arrow
keys to move
between these
menus.
> Remote Control
> IP Address
Set IP parameters for
Ethernet Control ports
using the edit and up
and down arrow keys.
> Subnet Mask
Set IP parameters for
Ethernet Control ports
using the edit and up
and down arrow keys.
> Gateway Address
Set IP parameters for
Ethernet Control ports
using the edit and up
and down arrow keys.
> Default MAC
Address
Set default MAC address
using the edit and up
and down arrow keys.
> Alarms
> <critical>
Lists currently active
alarms beginning with
critical alarms, then
major, etc. Use the
down arrow to see all
alarms menus.
> Versions
> Software Version
The versions list gives
the overall software
version and build
version of the unit.
> HW Config
> Accept Option
Slot Conf
This menu allows the
current hardware
configuration, i.e. the
MPMs fitted, to be
accepted as the
expected hardware
configuration.
To return to the
top level menu
press the left
arrow key.
> /System
IP address &
Service name(s)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
4-5
Front Panel Control
4.3.1
Top-Level Menu
Shortly after power-up this menu displays the name of the unit (SPR1100) and may
also display, on the line below, either the current IP Address or Service Name, if one
has been set.
Ericsson SPR1100
172.17.117.147
To navigate to the next level of menus press the  (Forward) key.
4.3.2
System Menu
The functions and sub-menus within the System menu are used to set Remote
Control, Alarms, Versions and Hardware Configuration. To access and edit the
System menus from the top-level menu, press the  (Forward) key. The first menu
displayed is the Remote Control menu, described below.
4.3.3
System > Remote Control
This menu provides user settings for Remote Control. To access and edit this menu
from the top-level menu, press the  (Forward) key.
/System
|
|
Remote Control
Press the  (Back) key to return to the System main menu.
4.3.3.1
System > Remote Control > IP Address
This menu enables you to view and edit the unit IP address. To access and edit this
menu from the Remote Control menu, press the  (Forward) key.
To modify the IP address, press the Edit key. Use the  (Forward) and  (Back)
keys to move between the digits and use the  (Up) and  (Down) keys to
increment or decrement the numeric value. Press the Save key to save any
changes or press the Edit key again to cancel.
/System/
|
Remote Control |
4.3.3.2
IP Address
172.17.117.147
System > Remote Control > Subnet Mask
This menu enables you to view and edit the subnet mask. To access and edit this
menu from the IP Address menu, press the  (Down) key.
4-6
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Front Panel Control
To modify the subnet mask, press the Edit key. Use the  (Forward) and  (Back)
keys to move between the digits and use the  (Up) and  (Down) keys to
increment or decrement the numeric value. Press the Save key to save any
changes or press the Edit key again to cancel.
/System/
|
Remote Control |
4.3.3.3
Subnet Mask
255.255.000.000
System > Remote Control > Gateway Address
This menu enables you to view and edit the gateway address. To access and edit
this menu from the Subnet Mask menu, press the  (Down) key.
To modify the subnet mask, press the Edit key. Use the  (Forward) and  (Back)
keys to move between the digits and use the  (Up) and  (Down) keys to
increment or decrement the numeric value. Press the Save key to save any
changes or press the Edit key again to cancel.
/System/
|
Remote Control |
Gateway Address
192.168.002.001
This is the last of the Remote sub-menus. Press the  (Back) key to return to the
Remote main menu.
4.3.3.4
System > Remote Control > Default MAC Address
This menu enables you to view and edit the default MAC address. To access and
edit this menu from the Gateway Address menu, press the  (Down) key.
To modify the default MAC address, press the Edit key. Use the  (Forward) and 
(Back) keys to move between the digits and use the  (Up) and  (Down) keys to
increment or decrement the numeric value. Press the Save key to save any
changes or press the Edit key again to cancel.
/System/
|
Remote Control |
Default MAC Address
00:20:aa:70:1a:c0
This is the last of the Remote sub-menus. Press the  (Back) key to return to the
Remote main menu.
4.3.4
System > Alarms
This menu lists currently active alarms. To access and edit this menu from the
System menu, press the  (Forward) key.
/System
|
|
Alarms
Press the  (Down) key to view the current alarms.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
4-7
Front Panel Control
4.3.4.1
System > Alarms > (Detail)
These menus enable you to view the alarms in increasing order of severity,
beginning with critical alarms, then major, etc. The severity of an alarm event may
be modified using the web GUI Alarms web page, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control
for details.
To access these menus from the Alarms menu, press the  (Down) key.
/System/
Alarms
|
|
<critical>
S1 Base Unit
HW Configuration Mismat
To view all of the current alarms, press the  (Down) key to display the next alarm
detail menu. Press the  (Back) key to return to the Alarms main menu.
4.3.5
System > Versions
This menu enables you to view the software version and build number of the unit. To
access this menu from the System menu, press the  (Forward) key.
/System
|
|
Versions
Press the  (Down) key to view the software and build versions.
4.3.5.1
System > Versions > Software Versions
This menu enables you to view the software version and build version of the unit. To
access this menu from the Versions menu, press the  (Forward) key.
/System/
Versions
|
|
Software Versions
6.7.0 Build 109
Press the  (Back) key to return to the Versions main menu.
4.3.6
System > HW Config
This menu allows the current hardware configuration, i.e. the transcoder modules
fitted, to be accepted as the expected hardware configuration. To access and edit
this menu from the System menu, press the  (Forward) key.
/System
|
|
HW Config
Press the  (Down) key to view the current hardware configuration.
4-8
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Front Panel Control
4.3.6.1
System > HW Config > Accept Option Slot Conf
This mens enables you to accept the option slot configuration. To access this menu
from the HW Config menu, press the  (Forward) key.
To modify the setting, press the Edit key. Use the  (Up) and  (Down) keys to
toggle between the available options (true or false). Press the Save key to save any
changes or press the Edit key again to cancel.
/System/
HW Config
|
|
Accept Option Slot Conf
false
Press the  (Back) key to return to the HW Config main menu.
Press the  (Back) key again to return to the System menu.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
4-9
Front Panel Control
BLANK
4-10
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5 Web GUI Control
Chapter 5
Contents
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.1.7 5.1.8 5.1.9 5.1.10 5.1.11 5.1.12 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.3.1 5.3.3.2 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.3.1 5.4.3.2 5.4.3.3 5.4.3.4 5.4.3.5 5.4.3.6 5.4.3.7 5.4.3.8 5.4.4 5.4.4.1 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Using the Web Graphical User Interface .............................................. 5-5 Title Bar ................................................................................................ 5-6 Standalone On-air / Off-air Button ........................................................ 5-6 Alarms/No Alarms Button ..................................................................... 5-6 About Button......................................................................................... 5-6 Tabs...................................................................................................... 5-7 Navigation Path .................................................................................... 5-7 Navigation Buttons Toolbar .................................................................. 5-8 Web Pages ........................................................................................... 5-8 Detail (Sub-Tab Web Page) Buttons .................................................... 5-8 Results Frame ...................................................................................... 5-9 Supported Actions and Features .......................................................... 5-9 Navigating the GUI Web Pages.......................................................... 5-10 Status ................................................................................................. 5-11 Status > Service Status ...................................................................... 5-11 Status > General................................................................................. 5-11 Alarms ................................................................................................ 5-13 Alarms > Current ................................................................................ 5-13 Alarms > History ................................................................................. 5-14 Alarms > Set Mask ............................................................................. 5-14 Alarms > Set Masks > Host ................................................................ 5-15 Alarms > Set Masks > Slot 1 (MPM 1)................................................ 5-15 Configure ............................................................................................ 5-16 Configure > Option Slots Status ......................................................... 5-16 Configure > Device Info ...................................................................... 5-16 Configure > System ............................................................................ 5-17 Configure > System > Slots ................................................................ 5-18 Configure > System > Network Configuration .................................... 5-25 Configure > System > Option Slots Status ......................................... 5-32 Configure > System > Base Unit ........................................................ 5-34 Configure > System > Standalone 1+1 Redundancy ......................... 5-39 Configure > System > IP Input Redundancy Switching Parameters .. 5-41 Configure > System > MGP support................................................... 5-42 Configure > System > SNMP ............................................................. 5-44 Configure > Services .......................................................................... 5-45 Inputs Pane ........................................................................................ 5-45 5-1
Web GUI Control
5.4.4.2 5.4.4.3 5.4.4.4 5.4.4.5 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.6.1 5.4.6.2 5.4.6.3 5.4.7 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 Outputs Pane ..................................................................................... 5-47 Properties Pane ................................................................................. 5-49 Modules Pane .................................................................................... 5-71 Information Pane ................................................................................ 5-74 Configure > Config Report ................................................................. 5-77 Configure > Save-Load ...................................................................... 5-79 Save Configuration to File .................................................................. 5-79 Restore Standard Configuration from File.......................................... 5-80 Upgrade Encoder ............................................................................... 5-80 Configure > Licenses ......................................................................... 5-80 Versions ............................................................................................. 5-81 Versions > Build ................................................................................. 5-81 Versions > Details .............................................................................. 5-83 Versions > Hardware.......................................................................... 5-84 Support............................................................................................... 5-85 Support > View Logs .......................................................................... 5-85 Support > System Files ...................................................................... 5-86 List of Figures
Figure 5.1 Web Page Overview ........................................................................... 5-5 Figure 5.2 Standalone Dialog............................................................................... 5-6 Figure 5.3 Alarm Dialog ....................................................................................... 5-6 Figure 5.4 About Dialog ....................................................................................... 5-7 Figure 5.5 Tabs .................................................................................................... 5-7 Figure 5.6 Navigation Path................................................................................... 5-8 Figure 5.7 Detail Button ....................................................................................... 5-8 Figure 5.8 Results Frame..................................................................................... 5-9 Figure 5.9 Web GUI Navigation ......................................................................... 5-10 Figure 5.10 Service Status Web Page ............................................................... 5-11 Figure 5.11 Status > General Web Page ........................................................... 5-12 Figure 5.12 Alarms > Current Web Page ........................................................... 5-13 Figure 5.13 Alarm Severity Drop-down Menu .................................................... 5-13 Figure 5.14 Alarms > History Web Page............................................................ 5-14 Figure 5.15 Alarms > Set Masks Web Page ...................................................... 5-14 Figure 5.16 Set Masks > Host Web Page .......................................................... 5-15 Figure 5.17 Set Masks > Slot 1 Web Page ........................................................ 5-15 Figure 5.18 Configure > Option Slots Web Page ............................................... 5-16 Figure 5.19 Configure > Device Info Web Page................................................. 5-17 Figure 5.20 Configure > System Web Page....................................................... 5-18 Figure 5.21 System > Slots Web Page .............................................................. 5-18 Figure 5.22 Slot 1 > MPM1 Web Page............................................................... 5-19 Figure 5.23 MPM1 > Video Web Page............................................................... 5-19 Figure 5.24 Video > Alarm Masks Web Page .................................................... 5-20 Figure 5.25 MPM1 > Audio Module Page .......................................................... 5-20 Figure 5.26 Audio Module > Alarms Web Page ................................................. 5-21 Figure 5.27 Audio Module > Dolby Metadata Presets Web Page...................... 5-21 Figure 5.28 Dolby Metadata Presets > Dolby Metadata Presets 1 Web Page .. 5-22 Figure 5.29 System > Network Configuration Web Page................................... 5-25 Figure 5.30 Network Configure > Control Interface Group Web Page............... 5-26 5-2
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.31 Figure 5.32 Figure 5.33 Figure 5.34 Figure 5.35 Figure 5.36 Figure 5.37 Figure 5.38 Figure 5.39 Figure 5.40 Figure 5.41 Figure 5.42 Figure 5.43 Figure 5.44 Figure 5.45 Figure 5.46 Figure 5.47 Figure 5.48 Figure 5.49 Figure 5.50 Figure 5.51 Figure 5.52 Figure 5.53 Figure 5.54 Figure 5.55 Figure 5.56 Figure 5.57 Figure 5.58 Figure 5.59 Figure 5.60 Figure 5.61 Figure 5.62 Figure 5.63 Figure 5.64 Figure 5.65 Figure 5.66 Figure 5.67 Figure 5.68 Figure 5.69 Figure 5.70 Figure 5.71 Figure 5.72 Figure 5.73 Figure 5.74 Figure 5.75 Figure 5.76 Figure 5.77 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Control Interface Group > Physical Control Port 2 .......................... 5-28 Network Configure > Data Interface Group 1-2............................... 5-29 Prompt for Changing IP Redundancy Mode.................................... 5-29 Active-Active, Same Network: Data Interface Group 3-4 ................ 5-30 Active-Active, Different Network: Data Interface Group 3-4 ............ 5-31 Network Alarm Configuration Web Page......................................... 5-32 System > Option Slots Status Web Page........................................ 5-32 Option Slots Status > Option Monitor Alarms Web Page ................ 5-33 Option Slots Status > Slot 1 Web Page........................................... 5-33 System > Base Unit Web Page ....................................................... 5-35 Base Unit > Voltage Rails Status Web Page................................... 5-36 Base Unit > Advanced Web Page ................................................... 5-37 Base Unit > Build Version Web Page.............................................. 5-38 Base Unit > Alarms Web Page........................................................ 5-39 System > Standalone 1+1 Redundancy Web Page ........................ 5-40 Standalone 1+1 Redundancy > Alarms Web Page......................... 5-41 System > IP Input Redundancy Switching Parameters > Web
Page................................................................................................ 5-42 System > MGP Support Web Page................................................. 5-42 MGP Support > MGP Group Web Page.......................................... 5-43 MGP Support > MGP Alarms Web Page ........................................ 5-43 Configure > System > SNMP Web Page ........................................ 5-44 Configure > Services Web Page ..................................................... 5-45 Input Pane ....................................................................................... 5-46 Input Pane Action Menu .................................................................. 5-47 Outputs Pane .................................................................................. 5-48 Output Pane Action Menu ............................................................... 5-49 Item Properties According to Item Selected in Output Pane ........... 5-50 Properties Window Showing Tabbed Levels ................................... 5-51 Properties > Action Menu (Input Selected)...................................... 5-51 Properties > Host Inputs Accordion (Input Transport Stream) ........ 5-52 Import Transport Streams Pop-Up Window .................................... 5-53 Properties > Transport Stream Accordion (Output Transport
Stream) ........................................................................................... 5-53 Properties > Transport Stream Accordion > Destination 2.............. 5-55 Properties > Service Accordion (Input Transport Stream)............... 5-55 Properties > Component Accordion (Input Transport Stream) ........ 5-56 Properties > Reflex Group Accordion (Output Transport Stream)... 5-57 Properties > Service Accordion (Output Transport Stream)............ 5-58 Properties > Video Component > Input Tab.................................... 5-60 Properties > Video Component > Format Conversion Tab ............. 5-61 Properties > Video Component > Encode Tab (Reflex) .................. 5-62 Properties > Video Component > Output Tab ................................. 5-63 Properties > Video Component > Component Pane ....................... 5-64 Properties > Audio Component > Input Tab.................................... 5-65 Properties > Audio Component > Encode Tab................................ 5-66 Properties > Audio Component > Encode Tab > Automatic
Loudness Control ............................................................................ 5-68 Properties > Audio Component > Alarms Tab................................. 5-69 Properties > Audio Component > Component Tab ......................... 5-70 5-3
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.78 Properties > Audio Component > Duplicate Component
Accordion........................................................................................ 5-71 Figure 5.79 Modules Pane ................................................................................. 5-72 Figure 5.80 Modules > Card Modules ................................................................ 5-72 Figure 5.81 Modules > Action Menu .................................................................. 5-73 Figure 5.82 Modules > Overview Pane .............................................................. 5-73 Figure 5.83 Modules > Service Pane ................................................................. 5-74 Figure 5.84 Modules > Details Pane .................................................................. 5-74 Figure 5.85 Information Pane............................................................................. 5-75 Figure 5.86 Information - Warnings.................................................................... 5-75 Figure 5.87 Information – Errors ........................................................................ 5-76 Figure 5.88 Information – Changes.................................................................... 5-76 Figure 5.89 Information – Changes Highlighted................................................. 5-77 Figure 5.90 Configure > Config Report .............................................................. 5-77 Figure 5.91 Configure > Config Report - Filtering .............................................. 5-78 Figure 5.92 Configure > Save-Load Web Page ................................................. 5-79 Figure 5.93 Save Configuration to File............................................................... 5-79 Figure 5.94 Restore Standard Configuration from File....................................... 5-80 Figure 5.95 Upgrade Encoder............................................................................ 5-80 Figure 5.96 Configure > Licenses ...................................................................... 5-81 Figure 5.97 Version > Build Web Page .............................................................. 5-82 Figure 5.98 Version > Detail Web Page............................................................. 5-83 Figure 5.99 Version > Hardware Web Page ...................................................... 5-84 Figure 5.100 Support > View Logs Web Page..................................................... 5-85 Figure 5.101 Support > System Files Web Page................................................. 5-87 List of Tables
Table 5.1 Web Page Icons, Buttons and Symbols ............................................... 5-8 5-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.1
Using the Web Graphical User Interface
The Ericsson SPR1100 is designed to be configured and controlled by its own web
graphical user interface (GUI). To use the web GUI, the IP address assigned to the
SPR1100 in the front panel system menu should be entered into the address field of
the web browser. Provided that the network is correctly configured, the Status page
should be automatically loaded and displayed.
A number of tabbed pages corresponding to the different functions of the SPR1100
are provided. An example tabbed web page is shown in Figure 5.1.
Monitoring
Buttons
Title Bar
Tabs
Navigation
Path
Navigation
Buttons
Web Pages
Detail
Folders
Results Bar
Figure 5.1 Web Page Overview
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-5
Web GUI Control
5.1.1
Title Bar
The header of the web page displays the Ericsson logo and the unit model number.
5.1.2
Standalone On-air / Off-air Button
At the right-hand side of the title bar this colored button indicates the redundancy
status of the unit: either red (FAIL) or green (OK). When clicked, further details are
displayed in a pop-up dialog. Click the OK button to close the dialog.
Figure 5.2 Standalone Dialog
5.1.3
Alarms/No Alarms Button
This colored button indicates the current alarm state: red (CRITICAL FAILURE),
amber (ERRORS) or green (OK). When clicked, a pop-up dialog shows details of
the most recent critical alarm. Click the OK button to close the dialog. For detailed
break down refer to Alarm Tab.
Figure 5.3 Alarm Dialog
5.1.4
About Button
This button, when clicked, displays an information dialog about the unit, including
the software version number. Click the OK button to close the dialog.
5-6
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.4 About Dialog
5.1.5
Tabs
The web pages for control and monitoring of specific functions are accessed by
selecting the appropriate function tab along the top of each web page. When you
switch between tabs, the browser remembers the path for each tab. See Figure 5.9
for an overview of all the available web GUI tab pages.
Figure 5.5 Tabs
5.1.6
Navigation Path
The web pages are organized into a tree-like structure, like the directory on a
computer. The current complete navigation path is displayed at the top of the web
page, which shows the route taken to the currently displayed web page. To return to
a higher level (parent) web page (folder), simply click on the relevant name link in
the Navigation Path or click on the tab above.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-7
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.6 Navigation Path
5.1.7
Navigation Buttons Toolbar
The toolbar provides various tools/buttons, depending on the web page selected.
Various icons, buttons and symbols can appear in the toolbar, depending on the
web page displayed.
Table 5.1 Web Page Icons, Buttons and Symbols
Item
Description
Click on this icon to navigate one step up (to the parent folder) in
the folder structure.
Click on this icon to navigate back to the previous view. This icon
typically appears when you are editing a single record in a table
or a sub-table.
Click on this button to apply the changes you have made to
parameters in this web page. The result of your actions will be
shown in the result window below.
Click on this button to refresh the current screen. This may be
useful if the screen contains read-only status parameters such as
measured Bit rates.
5.1.8
Web Pages
The content of the tabbed web pages (or folders) displays the unit parameters and
their current values. Some parameters will be modifiable by overtyping, by selecting
an option from a drop-down menu or by placing a tick in a check-box, as required.
Any changes made will not be applied to the unit until the Apply Changes button is
clicked in the Navigation Buttons Toolbar.
5.1.9
Detail (Sub-Tab Web Page) Buttons
Some tab web GUI pages provide further detailed pages/folders. Single-click
anywhere on the bar, folder icon or arrow to open the sub-tab web page. See Figure
5.9 for an overview of all the available web GUI tab pages.
Figure 5.7 Detail Button
5-8
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.1.10
Results Frame
The result frame at the bottom of the screen shows the results of command actions.
success, success with warnings or error may be displayed, with further details as
appropriate for more complex actions.
Figure 5.8 Results Frame
5.1.11
Supported Actions and Features

Drag and Drop – The web GUI supports drag and drop, for example in the
Configuration > Services page, to enables you to quickly copy services and
profiles. Additionally, when selecting services and profiles, the web GUI
supports Shift-Click operation to enables you to select multiple adjacent items,
and Ctrl-Click operation when selecting multiple non-adjacent items.

Drop-Down Menus – Some web GUI pages provide drop-down menus to
enables you to select from the available options.

Right-Click/Context Menus – Some web GUI pages provide right-click menus
for speedier configuration.

Parameter Highlighting – When you modify service and profile properties, any
changes you make will be highlighted as orange text. These changes will not
be carried out until they are confirmed, by clicking the Apply All green button.

Web Page Resizing and Collapsing – To enable you to view just the
information that you need, the panes displayed on some web pages may be
resized by dragging the pane boundary, or collapsed by clicking on the 
symbol in the pane boundary. If your monitor screen width is less than 1300
pixels, panes may be collapsed automatically.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-9
Web GUI Control
5.1.12
Navigating the GUI Web Pages
Figure 5.9 shows the main tab pages and detailed (sub-tab) web pages.
Figure 5.9 Web GUI Navigation
5-10
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.2
Status
The operational status of the SPR1100 can be monitored from the Status tab web
page. Further tabs can be selected from this top-level tab, which show the Service
Status and General status of the unit.
5.2.1
Status > Service Status
To view the service status of the unit select the Service Status tab from the Status
top-level tab.
Figure 5.10 Service Status Web Page
This page shows the current list of outputs for the equipment.
5.2.2
Status > General
To view the general status of the unit select the General tab from the Status toplevel tab.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-11
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.11 Status > General Web Page
The following are displayed on this web page:
5-12

IP Address – The configured IP address for the product.

Network Mask – The network mask address for the product.

Gateway – The gateway address for the product.

Data Port IP Addresses #1 - #4 – The configured data port addresses for the
product.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.3
Alarms
The alarms status of the SPR1100 can be monitored from the Alarms tab web
page. Further tabs can be selected from this top-level tab, which show the Current
alarms, History alarms and a facility which enables you to Set Masks or severity
levels for individual alarms.
5.3.1
Alarms > Current
To view the current alarm status of the unit select the Current tab from the Alarms
top-level tab.
Figure 5.12 Alarms > Current Web Page
This page displays a list of alarms which are currently active on the unit and all the
details of that alarm. The following color code is used:

Red – Critical alarms.

Orange – Major alarms.

Yellow – Minor alarms.
The column showing the Severity of the alarm comprises a drop down menu which
enables you to change the setting.
Figure 5.13 Alarm Severity Drop-down Menu
This menu may be used to change the default setting of alarms which do not affect
the operation being performed. Only Critical alarms cause a redundancy switch.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-13
Web GUI Control
5.3.2
Alarms > History
To view the alarm history of the unit select the History tab from the Alarms toplevel tab.
Figure 5.14 Alarms > History Web Page
This page shows the history of alarms on the unit. There are no editable fields on
this page.
5.3.3
Alarms > Set Mask
To view and set alarm masks of the unit select the Set Masks tab from the Alarms
top-level tab.
Figure 5.15 Alarms > Set Masks Web Page
5-14
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.3.3.1
Alarms > Set Masks > Host
To set alarm masks on the Host controller, select the Host button from the Set
Masks page.
Figure 5.16 Set Masks > Host Web Page
This page gives a detailed list of all the alarms that may occur on the Host controller
and provides a drop-down menu for each alarm to allow the user to select the
severity level of that alarm. This menu is identical to that shown in Figure 5.13.
5.3.3.2
Alarms > Set Masks > Slot 1 (MPM 1)
To set alarm masks on the Media Processing Module located in Slot 1, select the
Slot 1 button from the Set Masks page.
Figure 5.17 Set Masks > Slot 1 Web Page
This page gives a detailed list of all the alarms that may occur on the MPM located
in Slot 1, and provides a drop-down menu for each alarm to allow the user to select
the severity level of that alarm. This menu is identical to that shown in Figure 5.13.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-15
Web GUI Control
5.4
Configure
The Configure tab enables the user to view and/or configure all parameters of the
Stream Processor. Further tabs can be selected from this top-level tab, for Option
Slots, Device Info, System, Services, Config Report, Save-Load and Licenses.
5.4.1
Configure > Option Slots Status
To view and accept the current option slot status, select the top-level Configure tab
followed by the Option Slots tab.
Figure 5.18 Configure > Option Slots Web Page
This page gives details of the actual values and expected values for each of the
option slots. Any differences will generate an Option Slot Mismatch alarm. This
alarm is raised when an MPM is inserted or removed. To clear these alarms, select
the true option from the Accept Option Slot Configuration drop-down menu.
5.4.2
Configure > Device Info
This page displays various details about the units such as time and date, network
configuration and HTTP Authentication. To view and edit these details, select the
Device Info tab from the top-level Configure tab.
5-16
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.19 Configure > Device Info Web Page
The following fields, which may be edited by the user, are displayed on this page:
Time and Date Pane

UTC Time – Universal Time Code Time

UTC Date – Universal Time Code Date

SNTP Server – The address of the SNTP Server.
Network Configuration/Output Mode Pane

IP Address – The current IP Address.

Network Mask – The current Network Mask Address.

Gateway – The current Gateway Address.
HTTP Authentication Pane

Enable - Enable/Disable Basic Authentication via HTTP.

User Name – Current user name.

Password – Current user password.
SNMP Trap Server Pane

5.4.3
Trap Server Destination 1-5 – Enables you to configure the Trap Server
destinations and SNMP version/community.
Configure > System
This web page enables you to configure system-wide parameters of the unit. To
view this page, select the System tab from the top-level Configure tab.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-17
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.20 Configure > System Web Page
5.4.3.1
Configure > System > Slots
To view and configure the modules fitted in the unit, select the Slots button from this
web page. This web page is only used to configure some aspects of the unit: e.g.
Alarm Masks & Dolby Metadata Presets. Most configuration is done on the
Configure > Services tab.
Figure 5.21 System > Slots Web Page
The Slot 1 button enables you to configure the module fitted in Slot 1 of the unit.
5-18
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.4.3.1.1
Configure > System > Slots > Slot 1 > MPM1
To view and edit the parameters of the module located in slot 1, select the Slot 1
button from the System > Slots web page.
Figure 5.22 Slot 1 > MPM1 Web Page
This page gives access to a range of parameters and information associated with
the Media Processing Module.
Configure > System > Slots > Slot 1 > MPM1 > Video
Select the Video button from the Slot > MPM1 web page.
Figure 5.23 MPM1 > Video Web Page
This page gives the user the capability to configure the Alarm Mask settings for the
Video processor.
Configure > System > Slots > Slot 1 > MPM1 > Video > Alarm masks
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-19
Web GUI Control
To view and edit current settings, select the Alarm Masks button from MPM1 >
Video web page.
Figure 5.24 Video > Alarm Masks Web Page
This page gives a detailed list of all the alarms that may occur on the MPM video
processor and provides a drop-down menu for each alarm to allow the user to select
the severity level of that alarm. This menu is identical to that shown in Figure 5.13.
Configure > System > Slots > Slot 1 > MPM1 > Audio Module
Select the Audio Module button from the Slot > MPM1 web page.
Figure 5.25 MPM1 > Audio Module Page
This page gives the user the capability to configure the Alarm Masks and some
other settings for the Audio Module.
Configure > System > Slots > Slot 1 > MPM1 > Audio Module > Alarms
To view and edit current settings, select the Alarms button from MPM1 > Audio
Module web page.
5-20
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.26 Audio Module > Alarms Web Page
This page gives a detailed list of all the alarms that may occur on the MPM Audio
Module and provides a drop-down menu for each alarm to allow the user to select
the severity level of that alarm. This menu is identical to that shown in Figure 5.13.
Configure > System > Slots > Slot 1 > MPM1 > Audio Module > Dolby Metadata
Presets
To view and edit current settings, select the Dolby Metadata Presets button from
the MPM1 > Audio Module web page.
Figure 5.27 Audio Module > Dolby Metadata Presets Web Page
This page shows the Dolby Metadata Presets which are available and which can be
viewed and edited by the user.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-21
Web GUI Control
Configure > System > Slots > Slot 1 > MPM1 > Audio Module > Dolby Metadata
Presets > Dolby Metadata Presets 1
To view and edit current settings, select the Dolby Metadata Presets1 button from
the Audio Module > Dolby Metadata Presets1 web page.
Figure 5.28 Dolby Metadata Presets > Dolby Metadata Presets 1 Web Page
If Dolby encoding is selected, metatadata will be embedded in the encoded audio
stream to correspond to the following settings. The purpose and use of this
metadata is defined by Dolby and allows the decoder to make intelligent choices
when decoding the audio. For further information, refer to Dolby documentation.
Several preset groups can be setup to allow, if required, each encoded audio stream
to have different metadata.
See Annex D, Dolby Metadata Presets for further details of these parameters.
5-22

Preset Name – The current name of the selected preset.

Dialogue Normalization Level – A drop down menu giving a choice of values
from 1 – 31 dB
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control

Bitstream Mode – A drop-down menu enabling the selection of the bitstream
mode.

Line Mode Compression Profile – A drop-down menu enabling the selection of
the line mode compression profile.

RF Mode Compression Profile – A drop-down menu enabling the selection of
the RF mode compression profile.

Center Mix Level – A drop-down menu enabling the center mix level to be
specified.

Surround Mix Level – A drop-down menu enabling the surround mix level to be
specified.

Dolby Surround Mode – A drop-down menu enabling the Dolby surround mode
to be specified.

Audio Production Information Exists – A drop-down menu specifying whether
audio production information exists. Can be set to On/Off.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-23
Web GUI Control
5-24

Mixing Level – A drop-down menu specifying the mixing level.

Room type – Enables you to select the room and monitor type.

Copyright Flag – A drop-down menu enabling the copyright flag to be turned
On/Off.

Original Bitstream Flag – A drop-down menu enabling the original bitstream
flag to be set to On/Off.

Enable Extended Bitstream Information – A drop-down menu enabling the
extended bitstream information to be turned On/Off.

Preferred Downmix Mode – A drop-down menu specifying the preferred
downmix mode used.

Lt/Rt Center Mix Level – A drop-down menu specifying the left/right center mix.

Lt/Rt Surround Mix Level – A drop-down menu specifying the left/right
surround mix. Menu as above.

Lo/Ro Center Mix Level – A drop-down menu specifying the lo/ro center mix
level.

Lo/Ro Surround Mix Level – A drop-down menu specifying the lo/ro surround
mix level. Menu as above.

Dolby Surround Ex Mode – A drop-down menu specifying the Dolby Surround
encoding mode.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.4.3.2

A/D Converter Type – A drop-down menu specifying the analog-to-digital
conversion method used.

Digital Re-emphasis – A drop-down menu specifying the method of digital reemphasis used, if any.

DC High-Pass Filter Enable – A drop-down menu enabling the DC high-pass
filter to be set to On/Off.

Bandwidth Low-Pass Filter Enable – A drop-down menu enabling the
bandwidth low-pass filter to be set to On/Off.

Low Frequency Effects Low-Pass Filter Enable – A drop-down menu
enabling the low frequency effects low-pass filter to be set to On/Off.

Surround Attenuation Enable – A drop-down menu enabling surround
attenuation enable to be set to On/Off.

Surround Phase Shift Enable – A drop-down menu enabling surround phase
shift enable to be set to On/Off.
Configure > System > Network Configuration
To view and configure the network configuration, select the Network Configuration
tab from the System web page.
Figure 5.29 System > Network Configuration Web Page
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-25
Web GUI Control
The only user-editable field on this page is as follows:

5.4.3.2.1
Check duplicate IP Address – If this facility is enabled, the unit will ARP its
own IP address and raise an alarm if it receives a response.
Configure > System > Network Configure > Control Interface Group
To view and configure the Control Interface Group, select the Control Interface
Group button from the System web page.
Figure 5.30 Network Configure > Control Interface Group Web Page
The following user editable fields are available from this web page.
5-26

IP Redundancy Mode – Selects Active/Standby or Active-Active mode.

Index – Selects the Index number.

Autorevert – Enables autorevert mode on an interface group.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control

Autorevert Delay – Selects autorevert delay, 0 – 255 seconds. The time taken
to enable an interface to participate in redundancy after the interface link up is
established. If set to 0, the switch happen immediately.

Active Interface – Displays the current active interface.

Line Speed – A drop-down menu specifying the line speed.

Duplex Mode – Selecting Full Duplex allows bi-directional simultaneous
communications.

Default MAC Address – Displays the default MAC address.

IP Address – Enables entry of the IP address for the control port.

Subnet Mask – Enables entry of the subnet mask for the control port.

Gateway Address – Enables entry of the gateway address for the control port.
Physical control Port 1

Port Type – displays the port type (Ethernet).

Direction – displays port input or output type.

Index – displays port index number.

Default MAC Address – displays port default MAC address.

Link Status – displays port link status (and speed).

Link-up Time – displays the time that that link has been established.

Tx Packets – displays number of IP packets transmitted.

Rx Packets – displays number of IP packets received.

IP Address – displays port IP address.
Configure > System > Network Configure > Control Interface Group > Physical
Control Port 2
To edit the parameters of Port 2, select the Physical Control Port 2 button from the
Control Interface Group page. The following page is displayed and contains usereditable fields similar to those shown in Figure 5.30.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-27
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.31 Control Interface Group > Physical Control Port 2
5.4.3.2.2
Configure > System > Network Configure > Data Interface Group 1-2
To view and configure the Data Interface Group, select the Data Interface Group 12 button from the Network Configuration web page.
5-28
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.32 Network Configure > Data Interface Group 1-2
See Section 5.4.3.2.1 for details of user-editable fields.
5.4.3.2.3
Configure > System > Network Configure > Data Interface Group 3-4
Data Interface Group 3-4 is the output Ethernet interface. It can operate in activestandby and active-active modes. In active-active, it can additionally operate in
same network mode or different network mode.
Note:
Changing between these modes will require the unit to be rebooted for the
change to take effect. You will be prompted for this.
Figure 5.33 Prompt for Changing IP Redundancy Mode.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-29
Web GUI Control
Active/Active, Same Network
Figure 5.34 shows the web page settings for active-active, same network mode.
Figure 5.34 Active-Active, Same Network: Data Interface Group 3-4
Active-Active, Different Network
Figure 5.35 shows the web page settings for active-active, different network
mode.
In different network mode, the virtual IP address, network mask and gateway
address must be set individually for each multicast output. The configuration of
these items is thus not available on this screen, but must be set in the Services >
Properties > Transport Stream pane.
5-30
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.35 Active-Active, Different Network: Data Interface Group 3-4
5.4.3.2.4
Configure > System > Network Configure > Network Alarm Configuration
To view and configure the Network Alarms, select the Network Alarm
Configuration button from the Network Configuration web page.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-31
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.36 Network Alarm Configuration Web Page
This page displays a list of network alarms that are currently configured and all the
details of those alarms. Those alarms which are currently active are colored orange.
The column showing the Severity of the alarm comprises a drop down menu
(similar to that shown in Figure 5.13) that enables you to change the setting.
5.4.3.3
Configure > System > Option Slots Status
To view Option Slots Status, select the Option Slots Status button from the
System web page.
Figure 5.37 System > Option Slots Status Web Page
5.4.3.3.1
Configure > System > Option Slots Status > Option Slot Monitor Alarms
To configure the Alarm Mask Settings, select the Option Slot Monitor Alarms
button from the Option Slots Status web page.
5-32
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.38 Option Slots Status > Option Monitor Alarms Web Page
The column showing the Severity of the alarm comprises a drop down menu
(similar to that shown in Figure 5.13) that enables you to change the setting.
5.4.3.3.2
Configure > System > Option Slots Status > Slot 1
To view the Slot 1 parameters, select the Slot 1 button from the Option Slots
Status web page.
Figure 5.39 Option Slots Status > Slot 1 Web Page
The following fields are available on this web page:

Card Name – Name of the module inserted in Slot 1.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-33
Web GUI Control

Card Status – Indicates whether module has booted or not.

Card Mode – Indicates the module mode.

S-Number – Indicates the module S-number.

Power – Indicates power status.

Serial Number – Indicates module serial number.

HW Version – Indicates module hardware version number.
Device Lock Section

5.4.3.4
Current Key 1/2/3 – Enables entry of a key to lock the device.
Configure > System > Base Unit
To view and edit the base unit parameters, select the Base Unit button from the
System web page.
5-34
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.40 System > Base Unit Web Page
The following fields, not all of which are user editable, are available from this page:

MUX SCR Source – Allows selection of System Clock Source.

Device State (setmode) – allows setting of mode to offline or online. Selection
of Offline will surpress all outputs and related alarms.

UTC Time – Current Universal Time Code (UTC) time.

UTC Date – Current Universal Time Code (UTC) Date.

SNTP Server – SNTP server IP address.

Base Reflex Port – Base port on which to transmit/receive reflex messages.

Alarm status – Allows the setting of the alarm default status

Fans Mode – Allows the selection of Full speed or Auto. In Auto mode, fans will
adjust depending on airflow required.

Fan Speed Control – Configured fan speed, 1 is minimum, 7 is maximum.

LCD Contrast Control – Numerical contrast control.

LCD Brightness Control – Numerical brightness control.
User Authentication Section

Enable – Enable/disable basic authentication via HTTP.

User Name/Password – entering a user name and password will restrict access
to the encoder via the web server.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-35
Web GUI Control
The Fan Speed Status fields give information on the current speed of each of the 5
configured fans, in revolutions per minute (rpm).
The remaining buttons are described in the following sections.
5.4.3.4.1
Configure > System > Base Unit > Voltage Rails Status
To view the status of the voltage rails, select the Voltage Rails Status button from
the Base Unit web page.
Figure 5.41 Base Unit > Voltage Rails Status Web Page
5.4.3.4.2
Configure > System > Base Unit > Advanced
To view the advanced settings that apply to each module, select the Advanced
button form the Base Unit web page.
5-36
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.42 Base Unit > Advanced Web Page
The following fields are displayed on this web page:

Chip Id – Describes the pattern for the chip Id which is a unique identifier for
that particular module.

Requested Air Flow – The air flow required by each module to maintain an
acceptable temperature (-5 to +5).
Temperature Section

5.4.3.4.3
FPGA/PHY1/PHY2 Temperature – Shows the current temperature, warning
threshold and over threshold of these facilities.
Configure > System > Base Unit > Build Version
To view a standard list of versions present on the module, select the Build Version
button from the Base Unit web page.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-37
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.43 Base Unit > Build Version Web Page
The following read-only fields are available on this page:

Host Controller Card Id – Unique card Identifier.

Software Date – Date/time software was compiled.

Software Version –Software version number.

Hardware Version – Hardware version number.

S Number – Displays the s-number.

Serial Number – Displays the serial number.
The Software/Firmware section gives details of the versions of Software and
Firmware used on various components of the unit.
5.4.3.4.4
Configure > System > Base Unit > Alarms
To configure the alarm masks for the base unit alarms, select the Alarms button
from the Base Unit page.
5-38
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.44 Base Unit > Alarms Web Page
The column showing the Severity of the alarm comprises a drop down menu
(similar to that shown in Figure 5.13) that enables you to change the setting.
5.4.3.5
Configure > System > Standalone 1+1 Redundancy
To view and edit the Standalone 1+1 Redundancy parameters, select the
Standalone 1+1 Redundancy button from the System web page.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-39
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.45 System > Standalone 1+1 Redundancy Web Page
The following fields are available on this page:

Device Role – Role this unit takes in the redundancy group.

Peer IP Address – Address of the peer unit within the redundancy group.

ICMP Ping Period – The period between consecutive ICMP pings.

RPC Ping Period – The period between consecutive RPC pings.

Availability – Specifies a preference as to whether this unit should participate in
the redundancy group. If a secondary backup unit is unavailable, then an
automatic redundancy switch to that unit will not take place. If a primary (main)
unit is unavailable then an automatic switch to the secondary unit may occur
(depending on the state of the secondary unit). This is achieved through raising
a critical alarm on the unavailable unit.
Primary Device Section

IP Address – IP address of the Primary unit.

Status – Current unit status. Active indicates that all the unit’s data outputs are
enabled while Passive indicates that they are disabled.

Last Updated – The time at which the last configuration change was made.

IMPC Ping Status – Displays whether this unit can ping its peer.

RPC Ping Status – Displays whether this unit can ping its peer.

Alarm Status – Status of Primary unit alarm.
Secondary Device Section:

5-40
IP Address – IP address of the secondary unit.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.4.3.5.1

Status – Current unit status. Active indicates that all the unit’s data outputs are
enabled while Passive indicates that they are disabled.

Last Updated – The time at which the last configuration change was made.

Alarm Status – Status of Secondary unit alarm.

License Remaining – Number of days of backup license remaining. When this
reaches 0 the backup unit will go offline.
Configure > System > Standalone 1+1 Redundancy > Alarms
To configure the alarm masks, select the Alarms button from the Standalone 1+1
Redundancy page.
Figure 5.46 Standalone 1+1 Redundancy > Alarms Web Page
The column showing the Severity of the alarm comprises a drop down menu
(similar to that shown in Figure 5.13) that enables you to change the setting.
5.4.3.6
Configure > System > IP Input Redundancy Switching Parameters
This page gives access to an automatic redundancy switch which enables you to
select whether automatic switching is enabled between redundant IP input streams.
To display, select the IP Input Redundancy Switching Parameters button from the
System web page.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-41
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.47 System > IP Input Redundancy Switching Parameters > Web Page
5.4.3.7
Configure > System > MGP support
To view and edit the MGP Support parameters, select the MGP support button from
the System web page.
Figure 5.48 System > MGP Support Web Page
5.4.3.7.1
Configure > System > MGP Support > MGP Group
To view and edit the MGP Group parameters, select the MGP Group button from
the MGP Support web page.
5-42
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.49 MGP Support > MGP Group Web Page
The following fields are available from this web page:
5.4.3.7.2

MSM Multicast Address – Destination IP address of the MSM Packets.

MGP State – Current State of the MGP implementation.
Configure > System > MGP Support > MGP Alarms
To view list of MGP alarms, select the MGP Alarms button from the MGP Support
web page.
Figure 5.50 MGP Support > MGP Alarms Web Page
This page displays a list of MGP alarms that are currently configured and all the
details of those alarms. Those alarms which are currently active are colored orange.
The column showing the Severity of the alarm comprises a drop down menu
(similar to that shown in Figure 5.13) that enables you to change the setting.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-43
Web GUI Control
5.4.3.8
Configure > System > SNMP
To view and edit the SNMP Parameters, select the SNMP parameters from the
System web page.
Figure 5.51 Configure > System > SNMP Web Page
The following fields are available from this web page:

Version Description – Description of the current SNMP Version.

System Contact – Contact details for the system manufacturer.

System Name – Current system name.

System Location – Current system location.
SNMP Trap Server Section
5-44

Community – Community name for all trap messages.

SNMP Version – The SNMP version of the trap messages.

Trap Server 1/2/3/4/5 – This field enables you to configure the trap server
destinations and SNMP version/community.

Trap Sequence Index – The reference number of the last alarm trap sent.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.4.4

Config Trap Wait – The minimum time (in seconds) between each config
change message sent.

Config Event Index – The reference number of the config change trap sent.

Trap Level – Controls the levels of the alarm and start traps sent from the unit.
Configure > Services
This whole section (5.4.4.x) needs to be updated for the SPR1100. The screenshots
are not quite the same as there are no “ABR” services on the SPR1100.
This web page is where most of the settings are to create and edit trancoded
services. It is also where most of the encode parameters for video and audio are
set. To view this page, select the Services tab from the top-level Configure tab.
When this web page is selected, it takes a few moments to update the screen with
the current information. The messages, Loading Schema and Loading Device
Configuration will be displayed.
Figure 5.52 Configure > Services Web Page
The panels contained in this web page are described in the following sections.
5.4.4.1
Inputs Pane
The left-hand pane of the Configure > Services Web Page displays the input
Transport Streams which the SPR1100 is set up to receive.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-45
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.53 Input Pane
Transport Streams are grouped by Physical Interface. Each Transport Stream is
defined by its IP address and port number. Multiple services can reside within each
transport stream, with multiple components within each service.
The tree of input streams is navigated by expanding and contracting items using the
+ and – buttons alongside. All entries within an item can be expanded by rightclicking on that item and selecting Expand All.
Selecting an item (by clicking on it) causes the relevant properties for that item to be
displayed in the Properties panel. Properties that cannot be edited will be greyed
out.
Transport streams may be added to a Data Interface by right-clicking on the
interface entry and selecting Add transport stream.
5-46
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.4.4.1.1
Input Pane Action Menu
The Input pane Action button provides menu options for managing the content of
the Input pane, These options are also available on a context menu when you rightclick on the Input pane.
Figure 5.54 Input Pane Action Menu
5.4.4.2

Add transport stream – Enables a new Transport Stream to be created and
added to the Input Pane. Note that it can take several seconds for a transport
stream to be recognized and its components displayed

Import Transport Streams – Enables multiple Transport Streams to be
imported to the Input Pane, see Figure 5.61 on page 5-53 for details of this
dialog.

Delete selected… – Deletes the selected item from the Input Pane.

Collapse All – Collapses all the expanded lists of Transport Streams in the
Input Pane.
Outputs Pane
The second pane from the left defines the output services that will be produced by
the unit.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-47
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.55 Outputs Pane
Output services are again grouped by Physical Interface.
Output services are created by dragging across an input service from the input pane
and dropping on the IP Output Data Port.
Note:
5.4.4.2.1
Each input service may be used more than once to produce multiple output
services. This is achieved by dragging the same input service multiple times
to the IP Output Data Port. The Output Services will not be exactly
synchronized to each other. Each profile in each Output Service will require
separate licenses.
Outputs Pane Action Menu
The Outputs pane Action button provides menu options for managing the content
of the Outputs pane, These options are also available on a context menu when you
right-click on the Outputs pane.
5-48
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.56 Output Pane Action Menu
5.4.4.3

Add transport stream – Enables a new transport stream to be created and
added to the output.

Add Reflex Group – Enables a new Reflex Group to be created and added to
the output.

Duplicate selected on output – Enable the selected item to be duplicated on
the output.

Create PIP component – Enables a Picture-in-Picture component to be created
for the output.

Create PIP service – Enables a Picture-in-Picture service to be created for the
output.

Delete selected… – Deletes the selected item from the output.

Collapse All – Collapses all the expanded lists of Transport Streams in the
output.

Show Allocated Card – Displays (highlights) the relevant Media Processing
Module being used to transcode the selected item.
Properties Pane
The third pane from the left defines the properties of the items selected in the Inputs
or Outputs panes. Only the relevant properties and sub-panes (accordions) are
displayed, depending on the item selected. For each item selected, a number of
panes will appear in the Properties pane. These include:

Host Inputs

Transport Stream

Reflex Group

Service

Components
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-49
Web GUI Control

Video Component
Note:
If the video is within a Reflex Group, this pane will be called Video Reflex
Component.

Video PIP Component

Audio Component.

Duplicate Component
Note:
Not all of these will be available for every component.
The Properties pane is grayed out if no inputs or outputs are selected. To activate
the Properties pane to view and edit output parameters, select an item from the
Outputs pane.
Figure 5.57 Item Properties According to Item Selected in Output Pane
Each pane of the configuration may have several sets of parameters that may be
configured. These are arranged in a tabbed interface within the pane.
5-50
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.58 Properties Window Showing Tabbed Levels
5.4.4.3.1
Properties Action Menu
This menu is relevant only when a data interface is highlighted in the Inputs pane.
Figure 5.59 Properties > Action Menu (Input Selected)

Activate – Forces the selected unit to be the active or Primary unit in a 1+1
Redundant system.

Swap – Swaps over the Primary and Secondary units in a 1 + 1 Redundant
system.

Detach Secondary – Detaches the secondary unit.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-51
Web GUI Control
5.4.4.3.2

Delete Selected – Deletes the selected item.

Make Selected As Secondary – Forces the selected unit to be the slave or
Secondary unit in a 1+1 Redundant system.

Create Transport Stream – Enables a new Transport Stream to be created and
added to the Input Pane.
Properties > Host Inputs (Input)
The Properties pane is grayed out if no inputs or outputs are selected. To activate
the Properties pane, to view and edit input parameters, select Host Inputs from the
Inputs pane.
Figure 5.60 Properties > Host Inputs Accordion (Input Transport Stream)
The number of parameters on the Host Inputs accordion depends on the original
item selected. This accordion displays information and status about the Transport
Streams at the input. They can be enabled or disabled individually.
Import Transport Streams
The Import Transport Streams button enables multiple Transport Streams to be
configured. See Chapter 3, Getting Started for how to import Transport Streams.
5-52
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.61 Import Transport Streams Pop-Up Window
5.4.4.3.3
Properties > Transport Stream (Output)
To see details of a Transport Stream in the Outputs pane, select the Transport
Stream accordion from the Properties pane.
Figure 5.62 Properties > Transport Stream Accordion (Output Transport Stream)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-53
Web GUI Control
The following fields are available (not all of these parameters will always be present,
nor will they all be user-editable):

Output – Shows whether the stream is enabled in the output.

Transport Stream Id – Displays the ID of the selected Input Transport Stream.

Network Name – Network name for this stream.

Network ID – Numeric ID for this network.

Mode – Constant Bit Rate (CRB) or Variable Bit Rate (VBR) can be selected
using these check-boxes.

PSI/SI Level – Program Specific Information/System Information can be
selected from the drop-down menu.

PMT Repetition Period – Time between repetitions of PMT table, in ms. 100 or
500 can be selected.

Bit rate – Required bit rate in the stream.

IP Bit rate – Bit rate of the resulting IP stream.

TS Packets per IP Packet - Number of Transport Stream packets in each IP
packet.

IP Encapsulation – Type of IP packet in use.
Destination 1/2
5-54

destIPAddress – IP Destination address.

destUDPPort – Destination port for IP stream.

srcIPAddresss – Source IP address contained within outgoing packets.

srcMacAddress – MAC address contained within outgoing packets.

srcUDPPort – Source Port of outgoing packets.

ttl – Time To Live value of outgoing packets.

tos – Type of Service, as defined in RFC 2474.

actualSrcIPAddress – Actual IP address of output interface.

actualSrcMACAddress – Actual MAc address of output interface.

Enable Source – This box may be checked to enable the input source.

Multicast IP Address – Displays the multicast IP address.

Source Specific IP Address – Displays the source specific IP address.

Source UDP Port – Displays the source User Datagram Protocol port number.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Note:
In active-active, different network mode (see section 5.4.3.2.3), you must
set separate setting for the data 4 interface in Destination 2.
Figure 5.63 Properties > Transport Stream Accordion > Destination 2
5.4.4.3.4
Properties > Service (Input)
To see the service parameters of input Transport Streams, select the Service
accordion from the Properties pane.
Figure 5.64 Properties > Service Accordion (Input Transport Stream)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-55
Web GUI Control
The following fields are available (not all of these parameters will always be present,
nor will they all be user-editable):
5.4.4.3.5

Provider – The organization that created this service.

ID – Displays the ID of the service.

Type – Displays the type of service.

Name – Displays the name of the service.

PMT PID – The PID that holds the PMT describing this service.

PCR PID – The PID that holds the PCR describing this service.

PSI/SI Level – Grouping of services into channels within the Multicast.
Properties > Component (Input)
To view details of the individual components in an input transport stream, select the
Component accordion from the Properties pane.
Figure 5.65 Properties > Component Accordion (Input Transport Stream)
The following fields are available (not all of these parameters will always be present,
nor will they all be user-editable):
5-56

vnStream Type – Displays the type of vnStream.

vnStreamSub Type – Displays the sub-type of vnStream.

Coding Standard – Displays the Coding Standard.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
DVB Mode

PMT Stream Type – Displays the type of Program Map Table Stream in Digital
Video Broadcast mode.
ATSC Mode

PMT Stream Type – Displays the type of Program Map Table Stream in ASTC
mode.
Descriptor

5.4.4.3.6
bytefield – Displays the associated bytefield for the selected stream type.
Properties > Reflex Group (Output)
To see the service parameters of a Reflex Group, select the Reflex Group
accordion from the Properties pane.
Figure 5.66 Properties > Reflex Group Accordion (Output Transport Stream)
The following fields are available (not all of these parameters will always be present,
nor will they all be user-editable):

Name – User-definable name that appears on the output panel list.

Use max Available Bit Rate – Checked by default. This maximizes the bit rate
of the Reflex group to fill the entire Transport Stream (subject to a small
overhead to ensure the Transport Stream bit rate is never exceeded). An
allowance is made for PSI/SI tables and audio and data components so that the
Reflex group will not exceed the Transport Stream rate. Pass-through
component allowances:
-
data: 300 kbps
-
audio pass-through: 400 kbps
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-57
Web GUI Control
Un-checking this box allows you to set a specific group rate. If you know your
pass-through components are higher than the above allowance, you should
manually set a lower group rate.
Note:
5.4.4.3.7
If this box is unchecked and you set a Group Bit Rate manually, take care to
ensure that there is enough headroom to accommodate all non-video
components in the transport stream.

Group Bit Rate – When the above Use Max Available Bit Rate box is
unchecked, this field can be modified to set a specific group bit rate. When the
Use Max Available Bit Rate box is checked, this field is not modifiable and is
greyed-out, showing the bit rate that has been automatically set.

Video Delay – Enables a specific video delay to be set. The range of delay that
can be set depends on the output video format used (HD, SD, MPEG-2, H264).
Allowing a longer delay will usually give better overall coding efficiency and thus
better picture quality for a given group bit rate. The minimum bit rate (Bmin) that
a video component will be allowed to drop to will depend on the delay setting
and the output video format, so as to not violate the MPEG buffer models. Bmin
will be calculated and set automatically.
Properties > Service (Output)
This pane shows the Service accordion with the Service Properties tab selected.
The number of selectable accordions and the range of parameters within those
accordions is dependent on the item selected in the Outputs pane.
Figure 5.67 Properties > Service Accordion (Output Transport Stream)
5-58
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
The following fields are available (not all of these parameters will always be present,
nor will they all be user-editable):
5.4.4.3.8

Provider – The organization that created this service.

Name – The name of the service.

ID – Unique service ID in PMT.

Type – Type of service.

PMT PID – Program Map Table packet identifier.

Logical Channel – Logical Channel number in PMT.

PCR PID – Program Clock Reference packet identifier.

Input Decoder Delay – Input decoder delay.

Input PCR PID – Logical Channel number in PMT.
Properties > Video Component (Output)
To view and edit video component properties, select the Video Component
accordion from the Properties pane.
The Video Component Properties pane may display upto five tabbed panes: Input,
Format Conversion, Encode, Output and Component.
Properties > Video Component > Input
To view and edit the input properties, select the Input tab from the Video
Component accordion.
The Ericsson SPR1100 will attempt to detect the input Video format according to the
PSI table information in the input stream. If this is not available, or if the operator
wishes to override the auto-detected setting, this screen will allow manual
configuration of the video type.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-59
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.68 Properties > Video Component > Input Tab
The following fields are available:
5-60

Video X Alarms – This pane details video related alarms and allow the user to
determine the severity of these alarms by means of the drop-down menu:

Output on Video Loss – Selects the feature to be displayed if the video signal
is lost.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Properties > Video Component > Format Conversion
To view and edit the format conversion properties, select the Format Conversion
tab from the Video Component accordion.
Figure 5.69 Properties > Video Component > Format Conversion Tab
The following fields are displayed on this pane (not all of these parameters will
always be present, nor will they all be user-editable):

Default Aspect Ratio Conversion – The default aspect ratio of the output video
if AFD is not available on the input stream or if the "Use Input AFD" checkbox is
not selected..

Action on AFD lost – Action to be taken in the event that AFD is lost.

AFD Sustain – The behavior of AFD on the output if AFD on the input is lost.

AFD Sustain Timeout – How long to maintain AFD on the output if Off After
Timeout is selected in the AFD Sustain parameter.
Properties > Video Component > Encode
To view and edit video component encode properties, select the Encode tab from
the Video Component accordion.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-61
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.70 Properties > Video Component > Encode Tab (Reflex)
The following fields are available (not all of these parameters will always be present,
nor will they all be user-editable):
5-62

Profile – Profile / Level of encoding format to be used.

Resolution – Required output resolution.

Bit rate – Bit rate of output stream to be used for this component. For
components within a Reflex group, this setting has no affect. If the component is
moved to be outside of a Reflex group however, this bit rate will then be used.

Target Quality – Desired output quality as a percentage.

Aspect Ratio – Force output aspect ratio, or follow input ratio.

GOP Length - Number of frames in each GOP.

GOP Structure – Type of GOP.

Scene Cut Detection – Detect Scene Cuts. This should normally be selected to
improve picture quality across scene changes.

MCTF – Enable Motion-Compensated Temporal Filtering.

Closed GOPs – Ensure that GOPs have no external references.

H.264 NAL Packing – Network Abstraction Layer (NAL) packing options:
-
Separate NALs (MSTV Compliant)
-
Single NAL (Older STB compatibility)
-
Grouped NALs (Older STB compatibility)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Properties > Video Component > Output
To view and edit the video component output properties, select the Output tab from
the Video Component accordion.
Figure 5.71 Properties > Video Component > Output Tab
The following fields are available (not all of these parameters will always be present,
nor will they all be user-editable):

Closed Captions – Type of Closed Caption data to be included.

Copyright – Behavior of Copyright flag in the output stream.

Original – Behavior of Original flag in the output stream

AU Information Control – Enables additional information to be placed in the
Adaptation Field for "Trick Mode".

AR Signaling Output Control- Number of frames in each GOP.
Properties > Video Component > Component
To view and edit the video PID, select the Component tab from the Video
Component accordion.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-63
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.72 Properties > Video Component > Component Pane
There is only one field available:

5.4.4.3.9
PID – Packet identifier of the Video Component in the output Transport Stream.
Properties > Video Reflex Component
The details of the tabs are as for the Video Component accordion, described
above.
5.4.4.3.10
Properties > Audio Component
The Audio Component Properties accordion has four tabbed panes: Input, Encode,
Alarms and Component.
Properties > Audio Component > Input
The Input tab permits the user to set the input standard, the pass-through/transcode
mode, and the downmix type of the audio input. It also displays the status of the
current audio input.
The Input format will be auto-detected by the unit, but the operator may over-ride
that detection here if required.
To view and edit the input settings, select the Input tab from the Audio Component
accordion.
5-64
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.73 Properties > Audio Component > Input Tab
The following fields are available:

Input Format– Name of the currently selected input format.
Downmix Parameters

Downmix Type – Only relevant for Dolby input streams. Specifies how to
downmix from 5.1 to 2.0. Refer to Dolby documentation for more information
Input Status

Compressed Audio Locked.

Downmix Active – Check this box to activate downmix.

Level Left (L) – Left audio level.

Level Left (R) – Right audio level.

Input Buffer Level – Internal status information only.

Input Bit rate – The detected input bit rate.

Input Coding Mode – The detected input coding mode.

Resync Count – Internal status information only.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-65
Web GUI Control

Bad RC Packets – Internal status information only.

Delay – Shows the current delay through the unit.
Properties > Audio Component > Encode
The Encode tab permits the user to set various parameters controlling the audio
encoding.
To display the encoding settings, select the Encode tab from the Audio
Component accordion.
Figure 5.74 Properties > Audio Component > Encode Tab
The following Coding Standard options are available:
5-66

MPEG Layer II – MPEG Layer II encode. Requires one SPR/SWO/AUD/MP2
license for each stereo pair to be encoded.

Dolby Digital – Dolby Digital encode. Requires one SPR/SWO/AUD/AC3
license for each stereo pair to be encoded. Three licenses are required for 5.1
encoding.

AAC LC – Low complexity AAC encode. Requires one SPR/SWO/AUD/AAC
license for each stereo pair to be encoded. Three licenses are required for 5.1
encoding.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control

HE-AAC – High efficiency AAC encode (AAC with Spectral Band Replication).
Requires one SPR/SWO/AUD/AAC license for each stereo pair to be encoded.
Three licenses are required for 5.1 encoding
The following further fields are available (not all of these parameters will always be
present, nor will they all be user-editable):

Bit rate – Bit rate of output audio stream.

Coding Mode – Output channel mode selection (mono, stereo, or 5.1 as
appropriate to the Coding Standard in use).

AU Information Ctrl – Enable embedding PTS in the Adaptation Field for Trick
Mode.

Encapsulation – Container Format used for AAC.

TNS (Temporal Noise Shaping) – Enable/disable AAC TNS tool.

SBR Signaling – Method of signaling Spectral Band Replication.
Advanced

Lip Sync Offset – Timing advance/retard to correct audio/video
synchronization.

Gain – Allows a manual gain correction between +/– 6 dB (in 0.1 dB steps) to be
applied to the audio output.

MPEG Version – Sets whether MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 stream type is signaled in
the PMT.

Language – Sets the language signaled in the PMT descriptor.
Automatic Loudness Control
Automatic Loudness Control (ALC) is a feature available with a SPR/SWO/ALC/C
(charged) or SPR/SWO/ALC/F (free) license.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-67
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.75 Properties > Audio Component > Encode Tab > Automatic Loudness
Control
The following fields are displayed:

Operating Mode – The operating mode.

Target Level – Enables a target level in Loudness Units (LU) to be set.

Time Period – Enables a time period to be set.

Peak Limit – Enables a peak limit (in dBFS) to be set.

Maximum Boost – Enables a maximum boost (in dB) to be set.

Maximum Attenuation – Enables a maximum attenuation level (in dB) to be
set.

Preset – Enables preset options to be set:
-
Subtle
-
Standard
-
Strong
-
Reset Statistics
Properties > Audio Component > Alarms
The Alarms tab permits the user to set the severity of any audio alarm conditions.
5-68
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
To display the alarm settings, select the Alarms tab from the Audio Component
accordion.
Figure 5.76 Properties > Audio Component > Alarms Tab
This tab enables you to set the severity of a number of audio component alarms
using the drop-down menu displayed below.
Properties > Audio Component > Component
The Component tab permits the user to set the PID of the audio component.
To display the component settings, select the Component tab from the Audio
Component accordion.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-69
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.77 Properties > Audio Component > Component Tab
The following field is displayed:

5.4.4.3.11
PID – PID of the audio Component in the output Transport Stream.
Properties > Duplicate Component
The Duplicate Component accordion indicates that this component has already
been encoded elsewhere and is duplicated into this output profile. To change setting
of a duplicated component you will need to follow the link to find the main instance
where it is encoded.
Note:
A change to these settings will affect all duplicated components.
To display the Duplicate Component properties, select the Duplicate Component
accordion from the Properties pane.
5-70
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.78 Properties > Audio Component > Duplicate Component Accordion
5.4.4.4
Modules Pane
The column pane on the right of the web page displays allocation of resources. The
pane displays the modules available and provides three sub-tabs, Overview,
Services and Details.
Note:
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
If your monitor screen width is less than 1300 pixels, the Monitor pane may
be collapsed automatically. Double-click on any pane title to restore.
5-71
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.79 Modules Pane
5.4.4.4.1
Modules > Card Modules
By expanding the Card Modules icon at the top of the pane, the Media Processing
Modules are displayed in the available slots of the unit.
Figure 5.80 Modules > Card Modules
5-72
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.4.4.4.2
Modules Action Menu
The Modules pane Action button provides menu options for managing the content
of the Modules pane.
Figure 5.81 Modules > Action Menu
5.4.4.4.3

Show Allocation –For the slots highlighted in the Modules pane, this will
highlight in the output pane which services are actually being transcoded on
these slot(s).

Excluded selected from allocation – When selected, excludes the selected
module from allocation of services, i.e. the module will not be used. If services
are currently being transcoded on this module, they will be reallocated to
another free module, if available. Note that the reallocation will not actually occur
on the unit until Apply is pressed.

Allow reallocation of all services – When selected, this allows the allocation
algorithm to move existing services in order to try and free up space to allocate
new services (either because new services are being added to an existing
configuration or a module has been excluded). Thus, when selected, existing
services may glitch briefly when the new configuration is applied. If it is not
selected, existing services will not glitch, though the allocation may not be
optimum. In practice, the only reason to select this is if you are having trouble
getting a configuration to fit onto your unit.
Modules > Overview
Selecting this tab displays the amount of resource allocated or available with the
configuration currently set up on the page. By hovering over the graphics, further
details are displayed.
Figure 5.82 Modules > Overview Pane
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-73
Web GUI Control
5.4.4.4.4
Modules > Services
This pane enables you to see which services are allocated, available or potentially
available. To view the services, select the Services tab from the Modules pane. By
hovering over the graphics, further details are displayed.
Figure 5.83 Modules > Service Pane
5.4.4.4.5
Modules > Details
To view more details of the available modules, select the Details tab which will
show the allocated/available breakdown for each transcode type. By hovering over
the graphics, further details are displayed.
Figure 5.84 Modules > Details Pane
5.4.4.5
Information Pane
At the bottom of the Configure > Services page is an Information pane. This page
provides further sub-tabs for Warnings, Errors and Changes.
5-74
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.85 Information Pane
5.4.4.5.1
Warnings
Warnings are listed here when you make changes to a configuration and attempt to
configure a system that cannot be realized with the resources that you currently
have. A description of the warning is given along with an explanation of the Cause
and a possible Solution for you to attempt.
Warnings about your attempted changes can be ignored, by clicking the Apply
Changes button, but you may lose services or profiles as a result.
Figure 5.86 Information - Warnings
5.4.4.5.2
Errors
Errors are listed here when you attempt to configure a service incorrectly or fail to
supply sufficient data to complete your configuration. A description of the error is
given along with an explanation of the Cause and a possible Solution for you to
attempt.
When Errors are indicated you will not be able to save the configuration by clicking
the Apply Changes button.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-75
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.87 Information – Errors
5.4.4.5.3
Changes
Changes are listed here when you modify the configuration in the Input, Output or
Properties panes. Changes are not implemented until the Apply Changes button is
clicked.
Figure 5.88 Information – Changes
Any changes made to the configuration are highlighted in orange to enables you
to spot them clearly. When the Apply Changes button is clicked they return to
black.
5-76
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.89 Information – Changes Highlighted
5.4.5
Configure > Config Report
When the unit has been configured, the current state of the unit can be determined
from the Config Report page.
To view this page, select the Config Report tab from the main Configure page.
Figure 5.90 Configure > Config Report
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-77
Web GUI Control
The initial view shows each component of each service. The report indicates all
known data about the component, and also to which module and encode engine the
component has been allocated. The report is arranged in columns:

Output TS

Output Service

Output Component

Card (MPM)

Encode Engine

Input Service/Code

Primary Redundant Service

Input Service

Input TS

Input Interface
Drop-down boxes at the top of the report enable the user to filter which elements to
view. In this way, particular components can be found rapidly and accurately,
enabling stream faults to be found with ease.
Figure 5.91 Configure > Config Report - Filtering
5-78
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.4.6
Configure > Save-Load
To view this page, select the Save-Load tab from the main Configure page.
Figure 5.92 Configure > Save-Load Web Page
5.4.6.1
Save Configuration to File
This feature enables the current configuration to be saved as an XML file. This may
then be used as a back-up to archive your configuration settings for Transport
Streams, Services and Profiles entered on the web pages.
You can upload them (using the Restore Configuration from File feature,
described below) in the event that the settings have been changed or lost, or to
quickly load another machine with an identical configuration, if required.
It can also be useful to store frequent back-ups of your configuration during system
setup or to send a copy of the xml file to Customer Support in the event of problems
with your unit.
Figure 5.93 Save Configuration to File
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-79
Web GUI Control
5.4.6.2
Restore Standard Configuration from File
This feature enables the configurations stored as an XML file to be uploaded to the
unit. This will normally be a configuration file that has previously been saved (using
the Save Configuration to File feature, described above) from this or another
similar equipment.
This provides a quick and simple method of restoring a unit to operation, provided
that up-to-date back-ups are maintained.
Figure 5.94 Restore Standard Configuration from File
The uploaded configuration will be actioned immediately, when completed, provided
that the file is valid. In the event of an invalid file being uploaded, none of the
equipment settings will be changed.
5.4.6.3
Upgrade Encoder
This feature enables new software to be uploaded to the unit. This feature should be
used only under direction from Ericsson Customer Support.
Figure 5.95 Upgrade Encoder
5.4.7
Configure > Licenses
To view this page, select the Licenses tab from the main Configure page.
This web page details all the current licenses for features and options installed on
the unit and enables new licenses to be installed.
The list of current licenses is color-coded:
5-80

Green – license is enabled for this feature and available to use.

Red – license is disabled and the relevant feature is unavailable. This indicates
that a license has expired.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.96 Configure > Licenses
See Chapter 7, Options, Licensing and Upgrades for further instructions on
obtaining and installing licensed features on your unit.
5.5
Versions
Details of the unit’s components can be viewed from the Versions tab web page.
Further tabs can be selected from this top-level tab, which show the Build, Detail
and Hardware for the Host and Slots.
5.5.1
Versions > Build
To view the build status of the unit components select the Build tab from the
Versions top-level tab.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-81
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.97 Version > Build Web Page
The web page displays the Actual and Expected build version numbers for the
different software components that are used in the Host and the Slots. Confirmation
that the appropriate software has been detected is given by a Version OK message
in the end column. If the software actual and expected versions are incorrect a
Version Mismatch message is displayed in red.
5-82
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.5.2
Versions > Details
To view the detail of the software components select the Details tab from the
Versions top-level tab.
Figure 5.98 Version > Detail Web Page
This web page displays the Actual and Expected build version numbers for the unit
detailed software components. Confirmation that the appropriate software has been
detected is given by a Version OK message in the end column. If the software
actual and expected versions are incorrect a Version Mismatch message is
displayed in red.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-83
Web GUI Control
5.5.3
Versions > Hardware
To view information about the hardware components select the Hardware tab from
the Versions top-level tab.
Figure 5.99 Version > Hardware Web Page
The web page displays the Actual and Expected hardware version numbers for the
different hardware components that are used in the Host and the Slots.
5-84
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
5.6
Support
Various logs may be retrieved via xml files and may be viewed from the Support
tab. Further tabs can be selected from the top-level tab, which show View Logs and
System Files.
5.6.1
Support > View Logs
To view the log files select the View Logs tab from the Support top-level tab.
These log files may be useful, and may be asked for by Ericsson Customer Support,
in the event of a problem with your unit.
Figure 5.100 Support > View Logs Web Page
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-85
Web GUI Control
The following ‘main’ log files may be retrieved by right-clicking on the relevant link
and selecting ‘Save target As’, Save Link target as…’, or similar:

Event log since power on (messages) file.

Complete event log.

Event log tail.

Event log formatted with tabs.

Event log as tabbed CSV file.

Event log as comma-separated variables.
Other log files may also be retrieved from this web page, Again, right-click on the
relevant link and select ‘Save target As’, Save Link target as…’, or similar:
5.6.2

HTTP server log.

SNMP log.

kern log.

daemon log.

Similar units

Similar units as XML file.

All encoders.

All encoders as XML file.
Support > System Files
To view these files select the System Files tab from the Support top-level tab.
These system files may be useful, and may be asked for by Ericsson Customer
Support, in the event of a problem with your unit.
5-86
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.101 Support > System Files Web Page
The following system files may be retrieved by right-clicking on the relevant link and
selecting ‘Save target As’, Save Link target as…’, or similar:

XML Config. Details the current configuration of the unit.

Message Log. Lists various events and may be required to debug any problems
encountered.

Versions CSV File. A list of all the version information for the unit.

XSD Document. The XML Schema file used to format the XML Config file.

Error List CSV File. A list of all the possible errors on the unit.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
5-87
Web GUI Control
BLANK
5-88
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6
Stream Processing and Networking
Chapter 6
Contents
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.1.5 6.1.6 6.1.7 6.1.8 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.2 6.2.1.3 6.2.1.4 6.2.1.5 6.2.2 6.2.2.1 6.2.2.2 6.2.2.3 6.2.3 6.2.3.1 6.2.3.2 6.2.3.3 6.2.3.4 6.2.4 6.2.4.1 6.2.4.2 6.2.4.3 6.2.5 6.2.5.1 6.2.5.2 6.2.5.3 6.2.6 6.3 6.3.1 6.4 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction to Transport Streams ........................................................ 6-5 IP Encapsulation of MPEG Transport Streams .................................... 6-5 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets.......................................................... 6-5 MPEG Layer ......................................................................................... 6-6 RTP Layer ............................................................................................ 6-6 UDP Layer ............................................................................................ 6-7 IP Layer ................................................................................................ 6-7 Ethernet Layer ...................................................................................... 6-7 IP Overhead ......................................................................................... 6-7 SPR1100 Transport Streams ............................................................... 6-8 Overview............................................................................................... 6-8 MPEG-2 Compliancy ............................................................................ 6-8 Transport Streams ................................................................................ 6-8 TS IP Output Parameters ..................................................................... 6-8 Output Data Rate.................................................................................. 6-9 IP Port................................................................................................... 6-9 Services.............................................................................................. 6-10 Service Information Tables ................................................................. 6-10 Formation of SI ................................................................................... 6-10 Repetition Rate................................................................................... 6-10 Coded Elementary Stream ................................................................. 6-11 Supported Profiles .............................................................................. 6-11 Output Bit Rate ................................................................................... 6-11 PCR .................................................................................................... 6-11 Transport Packets .............................................................................. 6-11 Audio Output....................................................................................... 6-12 Transcoding........................................................................................ 6-12 Lip Sync.............................................................................................. 6-12 PID Assignment.................................................................................. 6-12 Transport Packets .............................................................................. 6-12 Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) Packets .................................. 6-12 Transport Packet Headers.................................................................. 6-13 Packetized Video Elementary Streams .............................................. 6-13 VBI Data on a Separate PID............................................................... 6-13 SPR1100 Redundancy ....................................................................... 6-13 Introduction to Redundancy................................................................ 6-13 IP Interface Redundancy .................................................................... 6-14 6-1
Stream Processing and Networking
6.4.1 6.4.1.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.6.1 6.4.6.2 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.3.1 6.5.3.2 6.5.3.3 6.5.3.4 6.5.3.5 6.5.4 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.6.5 6.6.6 6.6.7 6.6.8 6.6.9 6.7 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.2.1 6.7.3 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.1.1 6.9 6.9.1 6.9.2 6.10 6.11 6.11.1 Control Network Redundancy ............................................................ 6-14 Automatic Redundancy Mode ............................................................ 6-15 Data Network Redundancy ................................................................ 6-15 Same Network Mode.......................................................................... 6-16 Different Network Mode...................................................................... 6-16 Active/Active Port Mode ..................................................................... 6-16 Active/Standby Port Mode.................................................................. 6-17 Automatic Failover.............................................................................. 6-18 Automatic Revert................................................................................ 6-18 Device Redundancy ........................................................................... 6-18 Standalone (No Redundancy) ............................................................ 6-18 Dual Active ......................................................................................... 6-18 1 + 1 Redundancy .............................................................................. 6-18 Pairing Primary and Secondary Devices............................................ 6-19 Automatic Redundancy Switching...................................................... 6-20 Configuration Synchronization ........................................................... 6-20 Manual Controls ................................................................................. 6-21 Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP) ........................................................ 6-21 Transparent Addressing ..................................................................... 6-21 A Typical SPR1100 Redundant System............................................. 6-22 System Architecture ........................................................................... 6-22 Ethernet Interfaces ............................................................................. 6-23 Multicast Routing................................................................................ 6-23 Forwarding Capacity .......................................................................... 6-23 IGMP Snooping .................................................................................. 6-23 Control Network Interfaces................................................................. 6-24 MGP ................................................................................................... 6-24 Common TCP/UDP Port Numbers..................................................... 6-24 Example Addressing Scheme ............................................................ 6-25 Temperature Monitoring ..................................................................... 6-26 Host Card Monitoring ......................................................................... 6-26 Transcoder Module Monitoring........................................................... 6-26 Media Processing Modules ................................................................ 6-26 Fans ................................................................................................... 6-27 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) .............................................. 6-27 Real Time Clock ................................................................................. 6-27 SNTP Time Server ............................................................................. 6-27 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) ................................ 6-28 Supported Protocols........................................................................... 6-28 Operation ........................................................................................... 6-28 XPO.................................................................................................... 6-29 Clock & Timing ................................................................................... 6-29 User Configurable Parameters........................................................... 6-29 List of Figures
Figure 6.1 Figure 6.2 Figure 6.3 Figure 6.4 Figure 6.5 6-2
Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets ......................................................... 6-5 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets ......................................................... 6-6 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets ......................................................... 6-7 Key – Active and Connected IP Ports ................................................ 6-14 Interface Addressing - Same Network Mode...................................... 6-16 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
Figure 6.6 Interface Addressing – Active/Active Port Mode ................................ 6-17 Figure 6.7 Interface Addressing – Active/Standby Port Mode ............................. 6-17 Figure 6.8 Transparent Addressing in Device Redundancy ................................ 6-21 Figure 6.9 Typical SPR1100 System Architecture............................................... 6-22 Figure 6.10 Ingress and Egress of SPR ................................................................ 6-26 List of Tables
Table 6.1 Table 6.2 Table 6.3 Table 6.4 Table 6.5 Table 6.6 Table 6.7 Table 6.8 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
IP Overhead ......................................................................................... 6-8 TS IP Output Parameters ..................................................................... 6-8 Service Information Levels ................................................................. 6-10 Coded Elementary Stream Profiles .................................................... 6-11 Common TCP/UDP Port Numbers ..................................................... 6-25 Fan Speed Control Settings ............................................................... 6-27 SNMP Interface Parameters............................................................... 6-28 Clock Configurable Parameters.......................................................... 6-29 6-3
Stream Processing and Networking
BLANK
6-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
6.1
Introduction to Transport Streams
6.1.1
IP Encapsulation of MPEG Transport Streams
An MPEG Transport Stream has the following format.
1 to 7 MPEG Transport Stream Packets
RTP Header (optional)
UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
IP (Internet Protocol)
Ethernet (IEEE 802)
Figure 6.1 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets
Between one and seven MPEG transport stream packets are carried in a UDP
packet.
The UDP packet may optionally also contain an Real Time Protocol (RTP) header,
which adds additional information such as a sequence number and a timestamp,
which can help in the detection of packet loss across a network. The RTP header is
12 bytes long.
The UDP header is 8 bytes long.
The network layer protocol is IPV4, which adds a 20 byte header to every packet.
The physical link layer is then Ethernet at either 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps.
6.1.2
Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets
The mapping of MPEG-2 TS packets into IP data frames is done according to the
protocol stack shown in the following illustration.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-5
Stream Processing and Networking
Figure 6.2 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets
6.1.3
MPEG Layer
The MPEG-2/DVB layer is specified in ISO/IEC IS 13818 Generic Coding of
Moving Pictures and Associated Audio. The main functionality of this layer is to
transform MPTS (Multi-Program Transport Streams) into a number of SPTS (SingleProgram Transport Streams). A Transport Stream carrying multiple programs is in
this way split into a number of ‘mini’ Transport Streams, each carrying a single
program. This ensures that the video can be passed through limited bandwidth links
such as ADSL further down the transmission path.
6.1.4
RTP Layer
The RTP layer is optional, and will add an 8 byte RTP header to the new packet.
This header contains a sequence number and a time stamp.
6-6
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
6.1.5
UDP Layer
The UDP layer is according to RFC768 User Datagram Protocol. The user can
control the target UDP port number for the MPEG-2 stream. A configurable number
of 188 byte long MPEG-2 TS packets are mapped straight into an UDP frame with
no additional overhead. The MTU for Ethernet is usually 1500 bytes. This limits the
number of MPEG-2 TS packets per UDP frame to lie within 1 to 7. The following
illustration shows the mapping of MPEG-2 Transport Streams into UDP packets.
Figure 6.3 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets
6.1.6
IP Layer
The IP layer is according to RFC791 Internet Protocol Specification. The user is
allowed access to the following IP header fields: IP source address, IP destination
address, Time-To-Live field, Type-Of-Service field. Performing static mapping
between class-D IP addresses and the corresponding Ethernet multicast MAC
addresses supports limited IP Multicasting (Type 1).
6.1.7
Ethernet Layer
The data link layer is Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3/802.3u (auto sensing
10/100 Mbps, Twisted Pair, RJ-45 connector).
6.1.8
IP Overhead
The IP overhead calculation when mapping MPEG-2 TS packets into IP frames is
shown in Table 6.1.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-7
Stream Processing and Networking
Table 6.1 IP Overhead
Item
Overhead factor
Comments
MPEG-2 TS
1.0
UDP
1324/1316 = 1.006
UDP header=8 bytes
IP
1344/1324 = 1.015
IP header=20 bytes
Ethernet
1358/1344 = 1.010
Eth header=14 bytes
Total overhead factor becomes: 1.006 x 1.015 x 1.010 = 1.031 or 3.1% overhead.
Note:
The number of MPEG-2 TS packets one can map down into each UDP
frame is variable (between 1 and 7). Usually 7 is used for minimum
overhead. This is also used in the above calculation.
6.2
SPR1100 Transport Streams
6.2.1
Overview
6.2.1.1
MPEG-2 Compliancy
The encapsulated Transport Stream packets (video, audio, VBI/ANC data and PCR
- 188 bytes), are fully compliant MPEG-2 Transport Streams (all relevant fields
completed, continuity counters, PTS/DTS, adaptation fields etc.).
6.2.1.2
Transport Streams
The system can form up to 128 output Transport Streams, with each stream
mirrored on the two physical output interfaces.
Transport Streams are encapsulated in either a UDP or a UDP and RTP packet.
6.2.1.3
TS IP Output Parameters
The following parameters can be configured for a Transport Stream to be IP
encapsulated and output.
Table 6.2
6-8
TS IP Output Parameters
Parameter
Value
Description
TS packets per UDP packet
1 to 7 [Default 7]
Defines the number of Transport
Stream packets encapsulated in a
UDP packet
TS Mode
CBR
Constant bit rate output
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
Parameter
Value
Description
Output Enable
Off [Default]
IP Output is disabled
On
IP Output is enabled if the IP
destination can be resolved
Dest. IP Address
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
The destination IP address
Source IP Port
0 to 65335
Source IP Port number
[default = 5500]
Dest. IP Port
0 to 65335
Destination IP Port number
[default = 5500]
Type Of Service
0 to 255
[Default = 4]
Time To Live
[ Default = 15]
TTL value for inclusion in the IP
header
UDP [Default]
UDP encapsulation of TS packets
RTP
UDP/RTP encapsulation of RTP
Packets
RTP/FEC Column
UDP/RTP encapsulation of RTP
Packets with added onedimensional FEC
RTP/FEC Column
and Row
UDP/RTP encapsulation of RTP
Packets with added twodimensional FEC
Parameter
Value
Description
TS packets per UDP packet
1 to 7 [Default 7]
Defines the number of Transport
Stream packets encapsulated in a
UDP packet
Encapsulation Type
6.2.1.4
0 to 240
ToS value for inclusion in the IP
header
Output Data Rate
The system is designed to support a maximum output data rate of 216 Mbps per
Transport Stream, up to a total of 900 Mbps (nominally 1 Gbps) per chassis.
The bit rate of each output Transport Stream can be individually controlled with a
resolution of 1 kbps.
6.2.1.5
IP Port
The IP Encapsulator within the Host Card encapsulates Transport Stream packets in
either a UDP or a UDP and RTP packet before transmitting them out of the assigned
Data Ethernet port(s).
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-9
Stream Processing and Networking
6.2.2
Services
The system is capable of forming up to 72 services divided between the output
transport streams. Each service can contain a maximum of 18 elementary streams,
consisting of a maximum of 8 data components, 8 audio components, one main
video and one PIP video component.
An elementary stream can be included in up to four services. Only one main video
elementary stream can be assigned to a service, and the audio delay will be
matched to the video. A PIP Video stream may also be added. Only one PCR
(Program Clock Reference: A time stamp in the transport stream from which the
decoder timing is derived) can be associated with a service.
6.2.2.1
Service Information Tables
The Service Information (SI) tables that the system generates for each individual
output Transport Stream can be selected. The following table shows the available
levels.
Table 6.3 Service Information Levels
SI Level
Description
Off
Elementary streams only
On (PAT/PMT Only)
PAT/PMT are generated
On (PAT/PMT/SDT/CAT)
The listed tables are generated. The CAT will be empty as
Conditional Access is not supported in this release.
Some users may not require ETR 290 compliance, so it is possible to set the PMT
(Program Map Table) repetition rate to either 100 ms (default) or 500 ms.
Note:
6.2.2.2
The Program Map Table is part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific
Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance. Each
service has a PMT which lists the component parts (elementary streams of
audio, video etc.) for the various services being transmitted.
Formation of SI
SI packet formation and play out is the responsibility of the host card. However it is
the Media Processing Module's responsibility to provide SI data fields related to the
stream that it is generating.
6.2.2.3
Repetition Rate
The repetition rate of SI packets must take into account the output Transport Stream
rate, otherwise the jitter introduced by the multiplexing of packets to form the
Transport Stream can lead to the SI repetition rate being too long.
6-10
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
6.2.3
Coded Elementary Stream
The compressed output streams from the module are in the form of MPEG-2
transport packets that have been encapsulated into a Transport Stream packet.
6.2.3.1
Supported Profiles
The SD/HD MPMI Transcoder supports the profiles listed in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4 Coded Elementary Stream Profiles
6.2.3.2
Profile
Specification
MPEG-2 Main profile @ Main level (MP@ML)
ISO/1EC 13818
MPEG-2 Main profile @ High level (MP@HL)
ISO/1EC 13818
H.264 Main @ Level 3.0
ITU-T H.264 or ISO/IEC MPEG-4 AVC
H.264 High @ Level 3.0
ITU-T H.264 or ISO/IEC MPEG-4 AVC
H.264 Main @ Level 4.1
ITU-T H.264 or ISO/IEC MPEG-4 AVC
H.264 High @ Level 4.1
ITU-T H.264 or ISO/IEC MPEG-4 AVC
Output Bit Rate
The output rate of the transport packets is derived from the 27 MHz reference clock
and is accurate to within 1 kbps of the configured transport bit rate.
The output video bit rate of the MPM is configurable within ranges dictated by the
operating mode. These ranges are listed in the MPM Feature Summary page. The
configured video rate means the Transport Stream rate.
The module supports bit-stuffing to maintain configured bit rate if the operating
mode requires it.
The output of a module never exceeds the configured bit rate (or bit rate ceiling).
6.2.3.3
PCR
The MPM will insert a PCR in each video stream header. See Clock & Timing on
page 6-29.
6.2.3.4
Transport Packets
The MPM supports adaptation field stuffing of transport packets for the alignment of
PES packets to transport packet boundaries. Valid continuity counter values are
inserted into the transport packet headers.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-11
Stream Processing and Networking
6.2.4
Audio Output
6.2.4.1
Transcoding
The Audio Transcoder supports transcoding at 48 kHz only.
The audio output is formed of fully compliant MPEG-2 transport packets
encapsulated into a Transport Stream packet. The module runs in aligned mode
where there are an integer number of audio frames fitted into a PES packet,
therefore a PES packet will be the start of an audio packet.
The audio output rate is derived from the 27 MHz reference clock.
6.2.4.2
Lip Sync
The Video Transcoder ensures that lip sync is maintained between the limits of
audio leading video by 10 ms to video leading audio by 30 ms.
6.2.4.3
PID Assignment
The module enables a PID to be assigned to each audio channel separately, which
includes the ability to assign separate PID’s to every mono channel. The PID value
is configurable.
6.2.4.3.1
Assigning PIDs
If a PID has not been assigned a value (or is a value of 0) a unique PID will be
allocated to that component.
6.2.4.3.2
Duplicate PIDs
If a PID is given a value that is already in use, a Duplicate PID alarm is raised in the
logs that identify the Transport Stream and PID.
Note:
6.2.4.3.3
There is no facility to automatically re-assign duplicate PIDs to a unique
value.
PCR Placeholders
The module enables a PCR placeholder to be put in the adaptation field of every
audio PID stream. See Clock & Timing on page 6-29.
6.2.5
Transport Packets
6.2.5.1
Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) Packets
The Video Encoding module supports adaptation field stuffing of transport packets
for the alignment of PES packets to transport packet boundaries. PES streams carry
the stream_id = 0xE0.
6-12
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
6.2.5.2
Transport Packet Headers
PIDs used in the transport packet headers are configurable and have valid continuity
counter values inserted.
6.2.5.3
Packetized Video Elementary Streams
The compressed video data is packetized within MPEG-2 PES packets which are
configurable to be per picture or per GOP.
6.2.5.3.1
GOP Structure
6.2.5.3.1.1
Supported Structure
Support is included for standard IBP GOP structures with between 0 and 3 B
pictures. If H264 ‘Baseline’ profile is selected, no B frames are inserted irrespective
of the GOP structure setting on the UI (since the H264 specification prohibits
B frames in Baseline profile).
6.2.5.3.1.2
GOP Size
The maximum GOP size is configurable with an upper limit of 250.
6.2.5.3.1.3
B/P-Frames
The maximum number of successive B-frames (bidirectional prediction frames) in a
GOP is configurable. It is possible to have up to three B-frames successively.
GOPs may be forced to be closed if the appropriate checkbox is selected in the
Video Component Encode tab. Irrespective of this setting, the GOP is always closed
at a segment boundary.
6.2.6
VBI Data on a Separate PID
The SPR1100 supports pass-through of Closed Caption data which is embedded in
the input video stream. This is the only VBI supported.
6.3
SPR1100 Redundancy
6.3.1
Introduction to Redundancy
The following sections describe the possible operating modes, configurations and
network interconnections that may be employed in a redundant system. A
combination of techniques is normally required to create a working system.
The Ericsson SPR1100 is capable of providing:

Source Redundancy - using input source to protect against source or network
failure and ensure delivery of the Transport Stream. In the event of a source or
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-13
Stream Processing and Networking
network failure, the SPR1100 can be configured to gather its data from a
different input source; this can be the same content as the original Transport
Stream or a different Transport Stream, if required.

IP Interface Redundancy - using port configuration to protect against network
failure and ensure delivery of the Transport Stream. In the event of a network
failure, the SPR1100 can be configured to gather its data from a different input;
this can be the same content as the original Transport Stream or a different
Transport Stream, if required.

Device Redundancy - using a hot-standby or duplicate device to protect
against device failure. If a Chassis Critical alarm is asserted, the SPR1100 can
hand off all transcodes to a secondary unit using a 1+1 Redundancy Setup. The
unit stores a log of events such as power-on, alarm assertion and de-assertion,
etc. Every event in the log has a UTC time and date stamp attached to it to a
resolution of 1 second.
See A Typical SPR1100 Redundant System on page 6-22 for an example of a
system using multiple redundancy modes.
See Chapter 5, Web GUI Configuration for details of how to configure redundancy
using the Web GUI.
6.4
IP Interface Redundancy
Both the control and data interfaces provided by the SPR1100 can employ
redundancy. Each must be configured correctly to ensure the delivery of the
Transport Stream in the event of a network failure.
The following definitions are used in the network (IP Port connectivity) diagrams in
this section.
Figure 6.4 Key – Active and Connected IP Ports
Where: NICX= Network Interface Card Number (X)
SX = Subnet Number (X)
GX = Gateway Number (X)
6.4.1
Control Network Redundancy
The control network is assigned to the physical Ethernet ports CTL 1 and CTL 2.
CTL 1 is considered to be the primary port and CTL 2 the spare.
6-14
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
If both control ports have a link up, and Control Port Selection is set to Automatic
Redundant, the primary port will respond to network traffic but the spare port will
not. However, if the link goes down on the primary port, then the spare port will start
to respond to network traffic.
6.4.1.1
Automatic Redundancy Mode
In Automatic Redundancy Mode the primary port is used as default. If the primary
port link fails, control passes to the secondary port. However, if the primary port link
is restored then control passes back to the primary after the Auto-Revert delay
period.
The behavior of the system when the primary link is re-established depends on the
Control Port Auto-Revert Time setting.
If the Control Port Auto-Revert Time is set to 0, then the spare port remains the
active control port until its link goes down.
Otherwise, after the primary port has had a link present for the defined period of
time, it will resume being the active control port, and the spare port will cease
outputting to network traffic.
6.4.1.1.1
Auto-Revert Delay
If the control port selection is Automatic, then the Auto-Revert Delay defines the
period for which the primary port must have resumed a link up state before it
automatically reverts to being the active port.
The Auto-Revert Delay period is set in the range 0 to 999 seconds, with 2 seconds
being the default value.
If this is set to 0 then there is no automatic switch back to the primary port.
6.4.2
Data Network Redundancy
The SPR1100 has two Ethernet data ports operating as paired outputs. These are
designated Ge 3 and Ge 4.
Each port may have a different IP address, MAC address, subnet mask and default
gateway, providing output network redundancy. Only one port is active at any time,
with the other port in Standby mode. If the Active interface should fail, the Standby
interface takes over.
If both ports are configured to be on the same subnet, only one port will respond to
ICMP messages.
The data ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions, see
Chapter 8, Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-15
Stream Processing and Networking
6.4.3
Same Network Mode
In a Same Network Mode (also known as a Same Subnet Mode), both interfaces are
connected into the same network segments and must be isolated at the L2 level. In
this mode, every multicast uses a common virtual IP address for both interfaces.
Both interfaces use the same subnet mask and gateway IP address.
Figure 6.5 Interface Addressing - Same Network Mode
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) join is made using the physical
interface.
Note:
6.4.4
Redundant pairs of control interfaces only support same network mode and
active/standby mode.
Different Network Mode
In Different Network mode, each multicast output must have a different virtual IP
address on the Ge 3 and Ge 4 interfaces. The interfaces must be configured with IP
addresses that are in different subnets (see the section Services >Properties >
Transport Stream in Chapter 5, Web GUI Control). The subnets used for the
primary and secondary network must not overlap, i.e. one must not be a superset of
the other.
6.4.5
Active/Active Port Mode
An Active/Active Port Mode can be applied to both input and output data interfaces.
In this mode, both interfaces are either transmitting or receiving simultaneously.
6-16
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
Figure 6.6 Interface Addressing – Active/Active Port Mode
Active/Active interfaces maintain a virtual MAC and virtual IP address at all times.
Automatic failover and automatic revert features are not required on Active/Active
interfaces.
Note:
6.4.6
Input service redundancy can be configured on the input multicast streams
even though the input interfaces are ion active/active mode. See Chapter 3,
Getting Started and the section How to Make a Secondary Input.
Active/Standby Port Mode
An Active/Standby Port Mode can be applied to the output data interface. In this
mode, devices are transmitting or receiving via one interface but not the other. The
secondary interface is physically connected but not in use.
Figure 6.7 Interface Addressing – Active/Standby Port Mode
The virtual MAC and source IP address shall only be accessible via the active
interface.
Note:
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Redundant pairs of control interfaces only support same network mode and
active/standby mode.
6-17
Stream Processing and Networking
6.4.6.1
Automatic Failover
Automatic failover is available in Active/Standby Port Mode. If the active interface
suffers a link down failure, the standby interface takes over automatically. The
standby interface remains active until either the standby interface fails or a manual
switch is performed by the user.
6.4.6.2
Automatic Revert
Automatic revert is an option on most devices in Active/Standby Port Mode. If the
active interface suffers a link down failure, the standby interface takes over
automatically if Auto failover is selected. If the formally active interface recovers,
the device will wait for the configured Auto revert delay period and then revert back
to the original active interface. Auto revert can be disabled.
6.5
Device Redundancy
6.5.1
Standalone (No Redundancy)
In a Standalone system there is no protection against failure of the device. In the
event of a device failure the output profiles will be lost and streaming will be
interrupted.
This configuration can only use IP Interface Redundancy, described previously, to
provide protection against a network delivery failure.
6.5.2
Dual Active
Dual active means two units running identical configuration and both units are active
at the same time. SPR1100 does not currently support automatic mirroring of
configuration hence, for dual active operation, both units must be individually
configured.
6.5.3
1 + 1 Redundancy
In a 1 + 1 Redundant system, an active Primary device is used to deliver the
Transport Stream and Secondary device is configured as a Redundant spare or
Hot standby.
The configuration settings of each unit are automatically replicated to its peer. Each
unit is expected to be connected to the same input and output networks. Each unit
will be performing the same transcodes, however only one unit will be Active,
meaning only one unit will be outputting multicast packets.
6-18
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
Terminology
6.5.3.1
Primary
The main unit within a 1 + 1 Redundancy group. This unit is
normally expected to be Active (broadcasting).
Secondary
The backup unit within a 1 + 1 Redundancy group. This unit is
normally expected to be Passive (not broadcasting), but will go
Active (start broadcasting) if the Primary unit fails.
Standalone
The Primary unit can also operate in a Standalone role. In this
case the Primary will always be Active.
Active
The Active unit is the one that is currently broadcasting. There will
normally be exactly one Active unit (although both units can
become active under certain circumstances). In this case, the
MGP protocol should suppress once of the units output.
Passive
The Passive unit is the unit that is performing transcodes, but not
broadcasting. The unit is in a state where it is ready to take over
broadcasting.
Pairing Primary and Secondary Devices
Pairing is the process of the units in the redundancy group checking that the
configuration forms a valid redundancy group, synchronizing state and configuration.
On entering the pairing process a unit signals to its peer to also enter the pairing
process. The following are checked:

The role of both units (the roles must be Primary or Secondary and must not
be the same on both units).

The IP address that the peer has configured for Peer IP Address. For a valid
configuration the Peer IP Address setting on the other unit should refer to this
unit's control IP address.
Hardware configuration and software version numbers are also compared. If these
do not match an alarm is raised, although the units continue to pair.
If during the pairing process the peer unit cannot be successfully pinged for 30
seconds, then it is assumed that the peer is not available. In this case the unit will
become Active.
Once a successful configuration has been established, the Active unit will be
determined. For this the current Active state and the previous Active state are used.
If the unit has just been powered up, the current active state will be Passive.

If one of the units is Active and the other is Passive then the Active unit remains
Active and the Passive unit remains Passive. The configuration of the Active unit
is copied to the Passive unit.

If both of the units are Active then the Conflicting Status alarm is raised, and
both units remain Active. A Configuration Mismatch alarm is also raised to
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-19
Stream Processing and Networking
indicate that the configuration of the 2 units could not be synchronized
automatically.

6.5.3.2
If both of the units are Passive then the previous state is examined.
-
If one unit was previously Active and the other unit was previously Passive,
then the previously Active unit becomes Active, the previously Passive unit
remains Passive, and the configuration is copied from the previously Active
unit to the previously Passive unit.
-
If both units were previously Active or both units were previously Passive,
then the Conflicting Status alarm is raised, and both units remain Passive.
A Configuration Mismatch alarm is also raised to indicate that the
configuration of the 2 units could not be synchronized automatically.
Automatic Redundancy Switching
When the Primary is Active an automatic redundancy switch will occur when:

A critical alarm is present on the Primary and no critical alarm is present on the
Secondary for more than the time specified by Alarm Primary to Secondary
Delay

The Secondary is unable to ping the Primary for more than the time specified by
Ping Primary to Secondary Delay
When the Secondary has become active, it will remain active until the operator has
cleared the reason for the primary failure and manually requests a revert to the
Primary, i.e. there is no Auto-revert.
6.5.3.3
Configuration Synchronization
When configuration changes are made to the active unit in a redundancy group they
are automatically replicated to the other unit. Physical IP address settings are not
replicated between units and must be set independently for each unit. Certain 1+1
redundancy settings must also be set independently on each unit and are not
replicated.
Note
A web browser window open on the passive unit will not be automatically
refreshed, hence the operator must manually refresh this.
It is recommended that the Active unit web GUI is used the majority of the time, with
the Passive unit web GUI only used to configure settings unique to the Passive unit.
If a configuration change cannot be replicated on the peer (e.g. due to control
network failure), then a Configuration Mismatch alarm will be raised on the unit on
which the change was made. Once the network problem has been rectified, a
manual configuration copy should be performed so that both units are correctly
configured.
6-20
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
6.5.3.4
Manual Controls
There are a number of manual controls available. These allow configurations to be
copied between units and also allow manual redundancy switches between Primary
and Secondary units. The manual controls are intended to be used to resolve
conflicts, e.g. configuration changes that were made when the control network
connection was lost, or to allow the user to select the active unit in case the pairing
process cannot. The manual control is the only way to switch from Secondary to
Primary unit.
6.5.3.5
Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP)
If both units become Active, they will both be broadcasting the same multicast to the
downstream equipment. This can happen if the control connection between the units
is lost (the Secondary thinks the Primary has failed, so goes Active). To prevent this
happening, the MGP protection mechanism should be employed. It is recommended
that MGP is always enabled when 1 + 1 Redundancy is in use to protect against this
scenario.
MGP will prevent one unit broadcasting when another MGP enabled unit is already
broadcasting on the same multicast. In the scenario outlined above, MGP will
prevent the Secondary broadcasting. The 1 + 1 Redundancy state of the Secondary
will still be Active, however the multicast output is suppressed.
6.5.4
Transparent Addressing
Transparent addressing is a method by which all intermediate node addresses are
spoofed, so the client and server see each other's addresses and port
configurations as if there were no intermediate nodes.
Figure 6.8 Transparent Addressing in Device Redundancy
In normal operation, the main device transmits and the backup device is offline.
Main and backup devices will transmit using the same source and destination
addresses. Duplicate address protection is provided by either MGP or VLAN control.
The backup device is reconfigured on a redundancy switch. The downstream device
does not need to be reconfigured on a redundancy switch.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-21
Stream Processing and Networking
6.6
A Typical SPR1100 Redundant System
6.6.1
System Architecture
Figure 6.9 shows the Ericsson peripheral components that feed, or are connected to
the output of the SPR1100 in a typical system.
Figure 6.9 Typical SPR1100 System Architecture
This system comprises the following devices using various IP interface redundancy
(port configurations) and device level redundancy modes to achieve the system
configuration:

Receivers:
-
IP input redundancy - Active/Standby, same subnet interfaces.
-
IP output redundancy - Active/Active, same subnet interfaces.
-
Device redundancy - Transparent addressing in redundancy.
Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP) is used as the protection method against
duplicate multicasts in the network. See MGP on page 6-24 for further
information.
6-22

Network: Mirrored with redundant paths isolated from each other.

SPR1100:
-
IP input redundancy - Active/Active, same subnet interfaces, IGMP join
made on physical interface address.
-
IP output redundancy - Active/Active, same subnet interfaces.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
-
Device redundancy - Standalone 1+1 redundancy, transparent addressing
in redundancy.
Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP) is used as the protection method against duplicate
multicasts in the network. See MGP on page 6-24 for further information.
6.6.2
Ethernet Interfaces
All MPEG over IP interfaces should be fixed to Gigabit line speed and full duplex on
the SPR and the attached IP switch to avoid negotiation (and a potential speed or
duplex change) when on-air.
Interfaces to compression equipment (SPR data interfaces) should be 1000BaseT
copper interfaces.
MTU Ethernet size of 1500 (No jumbo frames).
Active/standby output port configuration is supported and in this case a trunk
connection between main/backup data switches maybe required.
6.6.3
Multicast Routing
Where Multicast Routing is required, switches must support multicast routing (typical
examples are PIM for any source multicast networks, and PIM-SSM for source
specific multicast networks. A local RP can be configured (PIM sparse) if data
switches are not interconnected (loopback interface for each data switch). Anycast
RP can be configured if data switches are interconnected.
Note:
6.6.4
There is an advantage on using SSM which is the allocation of less class D
addresses assigned to multicast video traffic.
Forwarding Capacity
MPEG over IP traffic usually runs at a constant bit rate, and buffers in the switch
must be able to cope with the sustained traffic level.
Ethernet switches should be capable of forwarding at line rate on all interfaces
simultaneously. The forwarding capacity should be calculated based on the fact that
Ethernet frames are 1316 bytes length (seven 188 MPEG packets per UDP frame),
i.e. Switch manufacturers often indicate a forwarding capacity based on shorter
Ethernet frame sizes (normally carrying regular TCP data traffic).
6.6.5
IGMP Snooping
Switches must be capable of Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) V2
Snooping (filtering by destination address).
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-23
Stream Processing and Networking
Switches must be capable of running an IGMP Querier. Typically the IGMP Querier
will be the VLAN with the lowest IP address if both main/backup switches are
interconnected through a trunk link (redundant data network – Active/Standby output
port configuration).
Switches must be capable of understanding IGMP V3 messages for SSM or ASM.
IGMP V3 Snooping (filtering by source and destination address) is desirable but not
mandatory.
6.6.6
Control Network Interfaces
The Control Network must be separate from the TS Data Network and Output
Network, MPEG multicasts must not be present on the Control Network.
The Control Network may be run with or without redundant switches.
When redundant switches are provided, the redundant control interfaces on the
compression equipment should be used.
6.6.7
MGP
Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP) is designed to protect against duplicate media
multicasts. Duplicate media multicasts result in an impact to service quality.
MGP relies on a Multicast Status Message (MSM) to inform a device whether a
duplicate media multicast is on the network. The MSM is transmitted in addition to
the media multicast by the sending device.
Each MSM contains an identifier that is unique to the sending device. In addition the
MSM contains a representation of source IP address(es) and media multicasts it is
protecting.
MSMs are transmitted on a UDP multicast that is unique to a media multicast or
collection of media multicasts.
Should a redundant device be required to go online it will first transmit and listen for
MSMs for the services it has been configured for. By parsing a received MSM, a
device can detect duplicate MSMs, since it will have a different unique identifier.
This will then indicate a potential duplicate media multicasts. A simple algorithm is
then executed to dictate and order of precedence between the two devices.
6.6.8
Common TCP/UDP Port Numbers
Table 6.5 lists port numbers that are typically configured in a system.
6-24
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
Table 6.5 Common TCP/UDP Port Numbers
Port
TCP/UDP
Description
21
TCP
ftp for device upgrades
23
TCP
telnet for control of ASI/SDI routers
80
TCP
http for web control of devices
123
TCP
NTP for time sync
123
UDP
NTP for time sync
161
TCP
SNMP
162
UDP
SNMP traps
1235-1242
TCP
Mux PSI/SI configuration
2443
TCP
Peer SCS
3389
TCP
Remote desktop access to the nCompass server
6400
TCP
Mux configuration
6867
UDP
MGP MSM source and destination ports (default)
6868
UDP
PCR Exchange (Reflex V5)
6869
UDP
M_MUX & M_ENC messages (Reflex V5)
6871
UDP
DSM (default)
6872
UDP
CSM (default)
8400
TCP
Mux configuration
9000
TCP
Mux configuration
Variable
6.6.9
nCompass Remote nClient (uses DCOM to connect)
Example Addressing Scheme
Figure 6.10 shows placement of IP ingress, egress on SPR chassis.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-25
Stream Processing and Networking
Figure 6.10 Ingress and Egress of SPR
6.7
Temperature Monitoring
Temperatures are reported to the user in degrees Celsius (°C) and degrees
Fahrenheit (°F).
6.7.1
Host Card Monitoring
The die temperature of the main components on the Host card are monitored, and
reported to an accuracy of ±2 °C.
A host card temperature alarm threshold can be set that, if exceeded, causes a
System Over Temperature Alarm to be generated.
6.7.2
Transcoder Module Monitoring
Transcoder modules monitor the die temperature of their main components, and
report these temperatures to an accuracy of ±2 °C. If a transcoder module reports
die temperatures, it allows an alarm threshold to be defined for each temperature,
which if exceeded causes an alarm to be generated.
6.7.2.1
Media Processing Modules
The controlling processor monitors the core temperatures of the main components
and passes this information back to the host card via the back plane for monitoring.
Temperature thresholds can be set to cause a warning or an alarm. The warning
level is configurable by the user, whereas the alarm level is hard coded.
6-26
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
6.7.3
Fans
The fans fitted to the chassis are speed controllable, and are a user configurable
parameter fan speed control.
Table 6.6 Fan Speed Control Settings
Parameter
Setting
Description
Fan speed control
Full speed
The fans run at the configured speed.
Auto speed
Fan speed is related to the temperatures
measured in the chassis.
See Chapter 8, Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding for further information.
6.8
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
The unit can obtain the current time from a network time server using SNTPv4 (RFC
4330) and is capable of working with Microsoft Windows Time, (SNTP as defined in
RFC 1767).
6.8.1
Real Time Clock
The Host Controller card has a real time clock, which is battery powered when the
chassis is unpowered, so that the time and date is maintained. This clock is
designed to be accurate to ±1 minute per month. The battery is capable of powering
the clock for over two years. See Clock & Timing on page 6-29.
6.8.1.1
SNTP Time Server
If an SNTP Time Server is selected, and communications are established with it,
then the unit uses the time obtained to correct the system’s real time clock, and the
user cannot set the clock.
If a time server has been configured, but it fails to respond, then an SNTP Server
Failed To Respond alarm is generated.
An SNTP server can be configured to update the clock and calendar or else the user
can update the time and date. Any changes to the time and date are recorded in the
system log.
The real time clock is used to set the time and date when the unit is started, but then
its own time and date is maintained, unless a change to the time and date
parameters occur, when it will be updated to the new settings.
The system can set or correct its system clock from information received from an
SNTP Time Server. More specifically it supports SNTP V4 and also Microsoft
Windows Time (W32Time), which means that it supports NTP V3.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-27
Stream Processing and Networking
The user can enter the IP address of the SNTP server to be used, the default
address is 000.000.000.000, which indicates to the system that no SNTP server
has been defined, and therefore SNTP is disabled.
If an SNTP server is defined, and it fails to respond, then an SNTP Server Timeout
alarm will be raised. This alarm will be de-asserted either when an SNTP response
is received, or the SNTP functionality is disabled.
6.9
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
6.9.1
Supported Protocols
SNMP versions 1, 2c and 3 are supported, primarily for alarm trap handling. The
General Ericsson MIB is also supported.
Note:
6.9.2
The unit does not support control via SNMP, all remote control is via HTTP
or HTTPS.
Operation
The unit’s SNMP functionality can be enabled or disabled, with up to five IP
addresses assigned for any SNMP Trap message to be sent. The default is
000.000.000.000, which causes the SNMP traps to be sent to the last SNMP
master. The SNMP community name can also be set.
The user can control which SNMP traps are generated. The options are;

Start Messages only

Fail and Start Messages only

All Traps
Table 6.7 SNMP Interface Parameters
6-28
Parameter
Description
SNMP Read Community
The SNMP community name for read access. default =
public
SNMP Location
Textual description of the location of the unit
SNMP Contact
Name of the person responsible for this unit
SNMP Trap Community
The SNMP community name for read access. default =
private
SNMP Trap Destination
The destination IP address for SNMP trap messages. Up to
five destinations can be defined, but by default none are
assigned
SNMP Trap Alarm Level
Defines what events trigger the generation of an SNMP trap
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Stream Processing and Networking
Parameter
Description
message. The options are: Start Messages Only, i.e. only
system start up events. Fail and Start Messages only i.e.
start-up events and critical alarms. All traps i.e. start-up
events and all alarms and warnings.
6.10
XPO
The unit supports an HTTP/HTTPS interface (see Appendix B, Technical
Specification for further details) that is XPO2 (the name given to the second
generation Ericsson standard for web pages and additional supporting interfaces)
compliant for configuration and status monitoring. At least three simultaneous
HTTP/HTTPS sessions can be supported. HTTP access can be enabled or
disabled.
Individual parameters can be controlled via XPO2. It does not require the complete
XML configuration to be sent to change a single parameter.
Note:
The legacy XPO standard is not supported.
The web pages provide a service orientated control menu structure.
6.11
Clock & Timing
The Host Controller card has a real time clock, which is battery powered when the
chassis is unpowered, so that the time and date is maintained. This clock is
designed to be accurate to ±1 minute per month. The battery is capable of powering
the clock for over two years.
6.11.1
User Configurable Parameters
The user configurable parameters associated with the clock are defined below
Table 6.8 Clock Configurable Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Local Time
hh:mm:ss
Current local time in hours minutes and seconds
Local Date
dd:mm:yyyy
Current date in day month and year
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6-29
Stream Processing and Networking
BLANK
6-30
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
Chapter 7
Contents
7.1 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.5 7.6 Introduction........................................................................................... 7-3 Media Processing Module - MPM1 HD/SD Transcoder
(SPR/HWO/MPM1)............................................................................... 7-3 Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................... 7-4 Loss of Video Input............................................................................... 7-4 Output Bit Rate ..................................................................................... 7-4 Program Clock Reference .................................................................... 7-4 Transport Packets ................................................................................ 7-4 Removal and Replacement of Modules................................................ 7-4 Handling Modules................................................................................. 7-5 Electrostatic Discharge......................................................................... 7-5 Installing a New Module ....................................................................... 7-6 Removing a Module.............................................................................. 7-7 Replacing (Hot-Swapping) a Module .................................................... 7-7 Obtaining New Licenses....................................................................... 7-9 Installed Licenses ................................................................................. 7-9 Verifying Which Licenses Are Present in the Unit ................................ 7-9 Ordering Additional Licenses................................................................ 7-9 Entering License Keys ........................................................................ 7-11 Installing Software and Firmware Upgrades....................................... 7-11 Installing a Patch File ......................................................................... 7-11 List of Figures
Figure 7.1 Figure 7.2 Figure 7.3 Figure 7.4 Figure 7.5 Figure 7.6 Figure 7.7 Media Processing Module .................................................................... 7-3 Inserting and Withdrawing Modules ..................................................... 7-5 Modules Pane - Reallocation................................................................ 7-8 Modules Pane – Exclusion ................................................................... 7-8 Finding the Host Card Chip ID for License Generation ...................... 7-10 Finding the Option Card Chip ID for License Generation ................... 7-10 Uploading a Patch File ....................................................................... 7-12 List of Tables
Table 7.1 Transcodes........................................................................................... 7-3 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
7-1
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
BLANK
7-2
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.1
Introduction
This chapter describes the options that may be used with the Ericsson SPR1100
Stream Processor, and the removal/replacement of options. IT also describes the
procedure to follow for obtaining licenses and how to upgrade your unit.
7.2
Media Processing Module - MPM1 HD/SD Transcoder
(SPR/HWO/MPM1)
The MPM1 Transcoder Card has a unique processing engine that extracts the
maximum efficiency possible from the MPEG-2 and H.264 specifications.
The media processing module is a single slot solution which can transcode multiple
MPEG-2 and/or H.264 video streams, at both SD and HD resolutions. Audio passthrough and transcode functionality is also supported.
Figure 7.1 Media Processing Module
The total maximum number of transcodes per module is related to the resolution.
At SD resolution, each MPM1 can perform 12 simultaneous transcodes.
Each transcode involving a HD-resolution stream on input and/or output reduces the
number of possible SD transcodes by 3.
Table 7.1
Transcodes
Maximum number of SD-to-SD
transcodes
Maximum number of HD transcodes
12
0
9
1
6
2
3
3
0
4
For details of the Video and Audio formats supported, see Annex B, Technical
Specification.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
7-3
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.2.1
Inputs and Outputs
The MPM1 has no external inputs or outputs. All data is passed into and out of the
module via the internal connectors.
7.2.2
Loss of Video Input
On loss of video input, the MPM1 can be configured to select one of the default test
patterns or a freeze frame as the output.
7.2.3
Output Bit Rate
The output rate of the transport packets is derived from the 27 MHz reference clock
and is accurate to within 1 kbps of the configured transport bit rate.
The output video bit rate of the MPM1 is configurable within ranges dictated by the
operating mode. These ranges are listed in Annex B, Technical Specification. The
Configured Video rate is also known as Transport Stream rate.
The module supports bit-stuffing to maintain configured bit rate, if the operating
mode requires it.
The output of a module never exceeds the configured bit rate (or bit rate ceiling).
7.2.4
Program Clock Reference
The MPM1 will insert a Program Clock Reference (PCR) in each video stream
header.
7.2.5
Transport Packets
The MPM1 supports adaptation field stuffing of transport packets for the alignment
of PES packets to transport packet boundaries. Valid continuity counter values are
inserted into the transport packet headers.
7.3
Removal and Replacement of Modules
This section gives information relating to the handling of option modules as they are
inserted/removed from the unit.
7-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.3.1
Handling Modules
Caution!
Care must be taken to when inserting or withdrawing modules to avoid damage to
underside components.
Modules must be kept orthogonal, i.e. at 90 degrees to the unit, to avoid catching
underside components on the chassis.
Figure 7.2 Inserting and Withdrawing Modules
Caution!
Do not plug in modules with excessive force as this may result in damage to the
module connector or other components. If any significant resistance to inserting a
module is felt, withdraw the module slightly and check for obstructions.
7.3.2
Electrostatic Discharge
Warning!
Static electricity can damage electronic components. To avoid damage, keep
modules in their static-protective package until you are ready to install them.
To reduce the possibility of electrostatic discharge, observe the following
precautions:

Where possible ensure that antistatic protection is worn (for example an earthed
antistatic wrist strap, an ankle or heel strap).
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
7-5
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.3.3

Handle modules carefully, holding it by its edges or its rear panel.

Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed printed circuitry.

Do not leave the modules where others can handle and possibly damage them.

While the module is still in its anti-static package, touch it to an unpainted metal
part of the system unit for at least two seconds. (This drains static electricity
from the package and from your body.)

Remove the module from its package and install it directly into your base
chassis without setting it down. If it is necessary to set the module down, place it
in its static-protective package.

Take additional care when handling modules during cold weather, because
heating reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity.
Installing a New Module
A new module can be inserted when the unit is powered off or on. When inserted
and powered, the unit will determine the module capabilities and make it available
for configuration. Initially a default set of parameters will be in place. As long as
there are licenses available for the features required, the module can then be
configured and used immediately.
Caution!
To avoid damaging the module, always handle carefully (see section 7.3.1) and
avoid electrostatic discharge (see section 7.3.2).
To install a new module:
1. Remove the blanking plate from the module slot in which the new module is to
be fitted.
2. Carefully remove the new module from its anti-static package, and insert it in to
the base unit, slotting the module edges in to the module guides.
3. Push the module home, so that the rear panel is flush with the rear of the base
unit.
4. Tighten the two captive retaining screws.
5. When the unit detects that a new module has been fitted, it will be displayed on
the Modules pane of the Configure > Services web page, and an alarm will be
raised. If all options are reported correctly, select the Allow reallocation of all
services option from the Action drop-down menu in the Modules panel. This
will accept the new hardware configuration and clear the alarm.
7-6
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.3.4
Removing a Module
Caution!
To avoid damaging the module, always handle carefully (see section 7.3.1) and
avoid electrostatic discharge (see section 7.3.2).
To remove a module:
1. Loosen the two captive screws that retain the module in the base unit.
2. Holding the captive screws, pull the module from the unit and place it in suitable
anti-static packaging.
3. Fit a blanking panel in place of the removed module.
4. When the unit detects a module is no longer present, it will be displayed on the
Modules pane of the Configure > Services web page, and an alarm will be
raised. Select the Allow reallocation of all services option from the Action
drop-down menu in the Modules panel. This will accept the new hardware
configuration and clear the alarm.
7.3.5
Replacing (Hot-Swapping) a Module
A module can be replaced without powering down the base unit, i.e. can be hotswapped. This will cause services to be allocated to other modules, enabling the
removal of the module in question. In this way, essential maintenance can be
carried out with minimum disruption. To perform a hot-swap, the modules should
only be unplugged or inserted when the unit is fully booted and configured.
Only ONE module should be hot-swapped at a time, to prevent problems due to
inrush current, and to ensure that the host recognizes and configures the new
module. If more than one module is being fitted, a wait time of approximately 10 s is
recommended between inserting each module.
Caution!
To avoid damaging the module, always handle carefully (see section 7.3.1) and
avoid electrostatic discharge (see section 7.3.2).
To replace (hot-swap) a module:
1. On the Modules pane of the Configure > Services web page, select the Allow
reallocation of all services option from the Action drop-down menu in the
Modules panel.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
7-7
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
Figure 7.3 Modules Pane - Reallocation
2. Change the exclusion settings for the module by selecting the module and
selecting Exclude selected from allocation from the Action drop-down menu.
Alternatively, right-click that module and select the same option from the
displayed menu.
Figure 7.4 Modules Pane – Exclusion
3. Loosen the two captive screws that retain the module in the base unit.
4. Holding the captive screws, pull the module from the unit.
5. Carefully remove the replacement module from its anti-static package, and insert
it in to the base unit, slotting the module edges in to the module guides.
6. Push the module home, so that the rear panel is flush with the rear of the base
chassis.
7. Tighten the two captive retaining screws.
Note:
If the replacement module is of the same type as the failed module, then it
will be automatically configured to the same settings as the failed module. If
the replacement module is of a different type then an alarm will be
generated.
The unit regularly monitors to verify module presence and to detect if a module has
been removed or added.
When a new module is inserted it will start-up and attempt to link to the host
controller. When this link has been established the process of identifying the module
and its capabilities begins. Once this is established, the module will be configured
with the same configuration as the module that has been replaced (assuming that
the replacement module has the same capabilities).
7-8
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.4
Obtaining New Licenses
The functionality of the SPR1100 depends on the hardware options fitted and the
software options installed. Software options are enabled or disabled by means of
license keys. A license key is a string of numbers which, when downloaded to a unit,
will enable a specific feature or feature set.
License keys can be purchased from your local Ericsson sales representative.
License keys may be installed by the user, allowing field upgrading of units to be
performed simply.
7.4.1
Installed Licenses
The unit comes with the option cards and licenses, which were ordered, already
installed.
All licenses are stored on the host.
7.4.2
Verifying Which Licenses Are Present in the Unit
Access to the web pages is necessary to verify the licenses that are enabled on the
unit.
Navigate to Support > Licenses. This page displays a tab for each card that
contains licenses. Each tab contains the marketing code, number of each license
and a description of the feature enabled by the license.
Note:
Short term licenses are not supported.
The number of licenses can be extended and new licenses ordered after the unit
has been shipped.
To get and upload additional licenses, proceed as follows.
7.4.3
Ordering Additional Licenses
When ordering additional licenses for existing units the following information is
needed:

Unique Chip ID of the unit to enable licenses stored on the base chassis. To
retrieve the Chip ID, go to Base Unit > Advanced tab.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
7-9
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
Figure 7.5 Finding the Host Card Chip ID for License Generation

The unique Chip ID of the option card to enable licenses stored on the card. To
retrieve the Chip ID, go to Slots > Slot N > MPM1 > Advanced.

The corresponding slot number MUST also be provided.
Figure 7.6 Finding the Option Card Chip ID for License Generation

The TOTAL FINAL number of licenses required (including licenses already
enabled on the unit) needs to be provided.
Based on the above information, a license key file will be generated and provided to
the customer.
7-10
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.4.4
Entering License Keys
The keys are saved in an XML (e.g. newlicensedetail.xml) ready to be entered onto
the unit via the web page.
1. Open Support > Licenses. Click the Browse button to locate the license key
file.
2. Click on the Upload button.
3. If licenses are required for both the base chassis and VCM option card then
multiple files will be provided which all need to be loaded onto the specific unit.
4. Reboot the unit for the changes to take effect.
Note:
7.5
The front panel CANNOT be used to upload license keys.
Installing Software and Firmware Upgrades
New software and firmware versions for your SPR1100 unit may be supplied,
enabling you to upgrade your unit(s) to install bug fixes or add new functionality.
To install a firmware upgrade:
1. Contact your Ericsson representative and specify the upgrade required plus the
serial numbers of your unit(s). This may be obtained by pressing the About
button at the top right-hand corner of any web GUI page to display a dialog
listing details about the unit, see Error! Reference source not found..
2. Your upgrade will be supplied as an EXE file. This is a wizard that will guide you
through the installation procedure.
3. Save the file to your computer.
4. Run the EXE file (by double-clicking on it) and follow the on-screen instructions
to install the upgrade.
In the event of a failed upgrade, please contact Customer Support for assistance.
7.6
Installing a Patch File
Software patches may be supplied for customer-specific issues, allowing you to
rectify problems or add specific features.
To install a patch:
1. Your patch file will be supplied as a viper file.
2. Save the file to your computer.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
7-11
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
3. From the web GUI, open the Configure > Save-Load page (See Chapter 5,
Web Control for details of this page). Browse to the key file and then Upload
the file to the unit.
Figure 7.7 Uploading a Patch File
4. Reboot your unit to activate the new software/firmware.
5. From the web GUI, open the About page and check that the software/firmware
version number now appears on the About dialog.
In the event of a failed upgrade, please contact Customer Support for assistance.
7-12
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Chapter 8
Contents
8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.3.1 8.2.3.2 8.2.3.3 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.4 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 8.5.3.1 8.5.3.2 8.5.4 8.5.5 8.5.6 8.5.7 8.5.8 8.5.9 8.5.9.1 8.5.9.2 8.5.9.3 8.5.9.4 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.2.1 8.6.2.2 8.7 8.8 8.9 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Introduction........................................................................................... 8-3 Preventive Maintenance ....................................................................... 8-3 Routine Inspection................................................................................ 8-3 Cleaning ............................................................................................... 8-3 Servicing............................................................................................... 8-3 Damage Requiring Service................................................................... 8-3 Replacement Parts ............................................................................... 8-4 Checks on Completion of Servicing...................................................... 8-4 Maintenance and Support .................................................................... 8-4 Introduction........................................................................................... 8-4 Warranty ............................................................................................... 8-4 Levels of Continuing Ericsson Service Support.................................... 8-4 Alarms .................................................................................................. 8-5 Fault-finding.......................................................................................... 8-6 Fault-finding Philosophy ....................................................................... 8-6 Preliminary Checks............................................................................... 8-7 Power Supply Problems/Unit Not Working ........................................... 8-8 Fuse Replacement ............................................................................... 8-8 Lithium Battery...................................................................................... 8-9 Fan(s) Not Working/Overheating.......................................................... 8-9 Cannot Access Web GUI.................................................................... 8-10 Communications (Control Port/Data Port) Alarms .............................. 8-10 Cannot Ping the SPR1100 ................................................................. 8-11 Configuration Problems ...................................................................... 8-12 MPM1 Transcoder Card Alarms ......................................................... 8-12 Alarm Handling ................................................................................... 8-12 Self-monitoring ................................................................................... 8-13 Module Responses............................................................................. 8-13 Manual Response to Alarms .............................................................. 8-13 SNMP Traps ....................................................................................... 8-13 What Is An SNMP Trap? .................................................................... 8-13 Using SNMP Traps ............................................................................. 8-14 Supported Protocols ........................................................................... 8-15 SNMP Interface Parameters............................................................... 8-15 Viewing Log Files ............................................................................... 8-15 Calling a Service Engineer ................................................................. 8-16 Disposing of This Equipment .............................................................. 8-17 8-1
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
List of Figures
Figure 8.1 Figure 8.2 Figure 8.3 Figure 8.4 Figure 8.5 Current Alarm List ................................................................................ 8-5 Position of Fuse Carrier........................................................................ 8-9 SNMP Trap Server Specification........................................................ 8-14 SNMP Trap Levels ............................................................................. 8-14 Viewing Logs ...................................................................................... 8-16 List of Tables
Table 8.1 Table 8.2 Table 8.3 Table 8.4 Table 8.5 Table 8.6 Table 8.7 Table 8.8 Table 8.9 8-2
Alarm Levels ........................................................................................ 8-6 Status LED Unlit Fault-finding .............................................................. 8-8 Fans Not Working/Overheating .......................................................... 8-10 Cannot Access Web GUI ................................................................... 8-10 Control Ports Alarms .......................................................................... 8-11 Data Ports Alarms .............................................................................. 8-11 Cannot Ping the SPR1100 ................................................................. 8-11 Configuration Problems...................................................................... 8-12 SNMP Interface Parameters .............................................................. 8-15 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.1
Introduction
This chapter details the schedules and instructions, where applicable, for routine
inspection, cleaning and maintenance of the equipment which should be performed
by an operator. It also details basic fault-finding procedures, software and firmware
upgrade procedures and disposal information.
8.2
Preventive Maintenance
8.2.1
Routine Inspection
Check cooling fan operation regularly. The fans are temperature controlled so may
not be on if the ambient temperature is low. Refer to Technical Specification for
more information.
Note:
8.2.2
Failure to ensure a free flow of air around the unit may cause overheating.
This condition is detected by a temperature sensor on the Host Card or an
MPM and causes the alarm to be raised. See Section 8.5.3.1, for further
information.
Cleaning
Caution!
Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Unplug the unit from the wall outlet before cleaning the exterior with a damp cloth.
Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Note:
Only the exterior of the case should be cleaned.
8.2.3
Servicing
8.2.3.1
Damage Requiring Service
Warning!
Do not remove the covers of this equipment. Hazardous voltages are present within
this equipment and may be exposed if the covers are removed. Only Ericsson
trained and approved service engineers are permitted to service this equipment.
Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service
personnel under the following conditions:
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
8-3
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.2.3.2

When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.

If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product.

If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions.

If the product has been dropped or the case has been damaged.

When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
Replacement Parts
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used parts
specified by the manufacturer or which have the same characteristics as the original
part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
8.2.3.3
Checks on Completion of Servicing
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician
to perform electrical safety checks to determine that the product is in a safe
operating condition. Also, performance and EMC checks may be required.
8.3
Maintenance and Support
8.3.1
Introduction
Ericsson is a leader in the design, integration and implementation of digital
broadcasting products and systems. It has a large team dedicated to keeping our
customers on-air 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
With regional offices worldwide, and ultra-modern specialist service facilities in the
US, UK, and Asia, Ericsson covers the world. There is a customer service centre
open round the clock, every day of the year.
Years of design and support experience enable it to offer a range of service options
that will meet your needs at a price that makes sense.
8.3.2
Warranty
All Ericsson products and systems are designed and built to the highest standards
and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty.
8.3.3
Levels of Continuing Ericsson Service Support
For standalone equipment, then Ericsson BASIC Essential support is the value for
money choice for you. BASIC provides you with year-by-year Service long after the
warranty has expired.
8-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
For systems support you can choose either Gold Business Critical support or
Silver Business Advantage. These packages are designed to save you costs and
protect your income through enlisting the help of Ericsson support specialists.
Call Ericsson Sales for more details.
8.4
Alarms
The SPR1100 reports any detected error condition by generating an alarm event.
Alarms are reported in several ways:

Front panel alarm status LED – indicates the most recent and highest level
alarm event. Displays red (CRITICAL FAILURE), amber (ERRORS) or green
(OK). See Chapter 1, Introduction for details.

Front panel LCD System > Alarms page - lists the currently active alarms. See
Chapter 4, Front Panel Control for details.

Web GUI No Alarm/Alarm summary Indicator – indicates the most recent and
highest level alarm event. Displays red (CRITICAL FAILURE), amber
(ERRORS) or green (OK). When clicked, a pop-up dialog shows details of the
alarm. See Figure 8.1, and Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for details.

Web GUI Alarms tab page – lists all current alarm events, provides a history of
all previous alarm events and enables alarm severity modification and masking.
Every alarm event type is assigned a severity level by default: masked,
warning, minor, major, or critical. See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for details.

Generation of SNMP traps.
Alarm level severity is set by default but may be modified by the user using the
Alarms > Current tab page on the Web GUI. See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for
details.
Figure 8.1 Current Alarm List
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
8-5
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Table 8.1 Alarm Levels
Alarm
Color
Description
Masked
Green
Any change of state of the alarm is logged, but no further
action is taken.
Warning
Yellow
Any change of state of the alarm is logged.
The alarm is reported on the Alarms > Current tab page.
An SNMP trap may optionally be generated for Warnings.
Minor
Yellow
Any change of state of the alarm is logged.
The alarm is reported on the Alarms > Current tab page.
An SNMP trap may optionally be generated for Minor alarms.
Major
Orange
Any change of state of the alarm is logged.
The alarm is reported on the Alarms > Current tab page.
An SNMP trap is generated.
Critical
Red
Any change of state of the alarm is logged.
The alarm is reported on the Alarms > Current tab page.
An SNMP trap is generated.
A control system will assume that the associated MPM has
failed, and will perform a card level redundancy switch.
Note:
If alarms are masked, they will not be displayed on any of the reporting
interfaces, and will not produce an SNMP trap message.
The Alarms > History tab on the web GUI maintains a history of all changes of
alarm states. In the event of problems with your unit, it may be worth investigating
the sequence of alarms that have been generated in order to isolate the origin of the
problem.
See Annex E, Alarm Lists for further details of possible alarm messages.
8.5
Fault-finding
8.5.1
Fault-finding Philosophy
It is the objective of this section to provide sufficient information to enable you to
rectify apparent faults or else to identify the suspect module, where possible. Some
basic procedures are provided to follow in the event of a suspected failure. It is
assumed that fault-finding has already been performed at a system level and that
other equipment units have been eliminated as the possible cause of the failure.
8-6
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Warning!
Do not remove the covers of this equipment. Hazardous voltages are present within
this equipment and may be exposed if the covers are removed. Only Ericsson
trained and approved service engineers are permitted to service this equipment.
Caution!
Do not remove the covers of this equipment. Unauthorised maintenance or the use
of non-approved replacements may affect the equipment specification and invalidate
any warranties.
This Reference Guide does not include any maintenance information or procedures
that would require the removal of covers.
If the following information fails to clear the abnormal condition, call a Service
Engineer or contact Customer Services using the information given in the
preliminary pages of this Reference Guide.
8.5.2
Preliminary Checks
Always investigate the failure symptoms fully, prior to taking remedial action. Fault
diagnosis for the equipment operator is limited to the following tasks, since the
operator should NOT remove the covers of the equipment:
1. Check the front panel and web GUI alarm indications to specify the nature of the
fault.
2. Confirm that the equipment hardware configuration is suitable for the purpose
and has been correctly installed and connected (see Chapter 2, Installing the
Equipment).
3. Confirm that inappropriate operator action is not causing the problem, and that
the equipment software set-up is capable of performing the task being asked of
it. If the validity of the configuration, set-up or operation is in doubt, check it (see
Chapter 5, Web GUI Control).
4. Check that the fans are unobstructed and working correctly.
on has been fully investigated, and the symptoms are
When the failure condition
known, proceed with fault-finding according to the observed symptoms. If the fault
persists, and cannot be rectified using the instructions given in this Reference
Guide, contact Customer Services. Switch off the equipment if it becomes unusable,
or to protect it from further damage.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
8-7
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.5.3
Power Supply Problems/Unit Not Working
If the unit Status LED is unlit, fault-find the problem as detailed in Table 8.2.
Table 8.2 Status LED Unlit Fault-finding
8.5.3.1
Step
Action
If Result of Action is
Yes…
If Result of Action is
No…
1
Confirm Status LED. Is
the unit working but the
display inactive?
If the unit is clearly
working normally then
the front panel may be
at fault. Call a Service
Engineer.
Proceed to next step.
2
Check Power Source.
Connect a known-working
piece of equipment to the
power source outlet. Does
it work?
The problem lies within
the unit or power cable.
Proceed to next step.
The problem lies with the
power source. Check
building circuit breakers,
fuse boxes, etc. If
problem persists, contact
the electricity supplier.
3
Check Power Cable and
Fuse. Unplug the power
connector from the unit
and try it in another piece
of equipment. Does it
work?
The problem lies within
the unit. Proceed to next
step.
The problem lies with
either the cable itself, or
with the fuse in the plug.
Replace the fuse or try to
substitute another cable.
4
Check PSU Module(s)
and Fuse(s). Ensure the
power connector is
unplugged. Remove the
fuse from the rear panel
connector and inspect it.
Has the fuse blown?
Replace the fuse with
one of the correct type
and rating (see Annex B
Technical Specification).
If the PSU still does not
work, unplug the power
cable and call a Service
Engineer.
Possible problem with the
PSU module. Call a
Service Engineer.
Fuse Replacement
Fuses are held in integral fuse carriers at the AC power inlets at the rear panel.
Note:
Refer to Technical Specification for more information about the fuse.
Warning!
Before replacing the rear panel fuses, disconnect the unit from the supply. Failure to
do this may expose hazardous voltages. Unplug the unit from the local supply
socket.
To replace the AC power fuse(s):
8-8
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
1. Ensure the power is turned off and the power cable is disconnected from the AC
power inlet(s).
2. Ease out the fuse carrier by placing a small, flat-bladed screwdriver in the notch
at the top of the carrier.
Caution!
When replacing the power input fuses, always ensure that a fuse of the correct type
and rating is fitted. Failure to do so results in inadequate protection.
3. Replace the fuse in the carrier.
4. Insert the fuse carrier back in the AC power inlet.
AC Power Inlet
If required, use a small flatbladed screwdriver in the
notch at the top of the
carrier to ease it out
Fuse Carrier
Figure 8.2 Position of Fuse Carrier
If the replacement fuse also blows, do not continue. Disconnect the equipment and
contact Customer Services for advice.
8.5.3.2
Lithium Battery
The lithium battery fitted within this product is not user replaceable and as such
should only be replaced by qualified service personnel.
8.5.4
Fan(s) Not Working/Overheating
The fans can be disabled at low temperatures to allow the unit to quickly attain
operational temperature. In the event of overheating problems, refer to Table 8.3.
Note:
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Failure to ensure a free air-flow around the unit may cause overheating.
This condition is detected by a temperature sensor; it may be used to trigger
an automatic alarm.
8-9
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Table 8.3 Fans Not Working/Overheating
8.5.5
Step
Action
If Result of Action is
Yes…
If Result of Action is
No…
1
Check Fan Rotation.
Inspect the fans located at
the sides of the enclosure.
Are the fans rotating?
Check Base Board
temperature and fan.
Check that the unit has
been installed with
sufficient space allowed
for air-flow (see Chapter
2, Installing the
Equipment). If the
ambient air is too hot,
additional cooling may
be required.
Possible break in the DC
supply from the PSU
module to the suspect
fan(s). Call a Service
Engineer.
Cannot Access Web GUI
In the event that you cannot access the SPR1100 web GUI, refer to Table 8.4.
Table 8.4 Cannot Access Web GUI
8.5.6
Step
Action
If Result of Action is
Yes…
If Result of Action is
No…
1
Check IP Connectivity.
Ping the SPR1100 from
another device on the
same IP subnet using the
device command prompt.
Does the unit return the
ping?
Ensure you are using an
appropriate browser.
See Chapter 5, Web
GUI Control for details.
Proceed to next step.
Check you have the
correct IP address.
2
Check other SPR1100
web GUIs or websites.
Does the browser access
other IP addresses?
There is a problem with
the SPR1100. Proceed
to next step.
There is a problem with
the computer you are
using to access the
network, or with the
network.
3
Restart the SPR1100.
Can you access the web
GUI now?
Check your
configuration. You may
need to reload a saved
configuration to restore
your system.
Possible problem with the
SPR1100. Call a Service
Engineer.
See Cannot Ping the
SPR1100, below.
Communications (Control Port/Data Port) Alarms
The control ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions.
8-10
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Table 8.5 Control Ports Alarms
Alarm
Description
Ctrl x: Link Down
No link has been established on this Ethernet Control
Port.
Ctrl x: Duplicate Control IP
Address Detected
Another device has responded to an ARP request for
this Control port IP address.
The data ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions.
Table 8.6 Data Ports Alarms
8.5.7
Alarm
Description
Data x: Link Down
No link has been established on this Ethernet Data
Port.
Data x: Duplicate IP Address
Duplicate IP Address Detected; Another device has
responded to an ARP request for the IP address of this
port.
Cannot Ping the SPR1100
‘Pinging’ a computer is a way to check and see if a computer is on the network.
Pings send a network request to a computer asking it to respond (ICMP
ECHO_REQUEST).
To ping a computer from a Windows/PC machine, use the MSDOS prompt and type
the command: ping <IP address>
A successful ‘ping’ consists of receiving back a copy of a short transmitted test
message. The reply will display ‘ping statistics’ (number of packets sent and
received and the time taken, in ms, to receive back those packets.
In the event that you cannot ping your SPR1100 unit, refer to Table 8.7.
Table 8.7 Cannot Ping the SPR1100
Step
Action
If Result of Action is
Yes…
If Result of Action is
No…
1
Check Connection at
back of PC. Is the
network connection
connected and active?
Possible network or
SPR1100 problem.
Proceed to next step.
Change port/replace
cable, if necessary, and
check network settings.
2
Check Connection at
back of SPR1100. Is the
network connection
connected and active?
Possible network
problem. Proceed to
next step.
Change port/replace
cable, if necessary, and
check network settings.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
8-11
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.5.8
Step
Action
If Result of Action is
Yes…
If Result of Action is
No…
3
Check network switch
operation. Is the network
switch connected and
active?
Possible network
problem. Proceed to
next step.
Change port/replace
cable/replace network
switch, if necessary, and
check network settings.
4
Check network
operation. Ping other
devices on the same IP
subnet using the device
command prompt. Can
you ping other devices?
Network is operational.
Possible SPR1100
problem. Call a Service
Engineer.
Possible problem with IP
switch, router or network.
Contact your network
administrator.
Configuration Problems
In the event that you have configuration problems, refer to Table 8.8.
Table 8.8 Configuration Problems
Step
Action
If Result of Action is
Yes…
If Result of Action is
No…
1
Check configuration
settings. Is your
configuration workable?
Proceed to next step.
Adjust settings, if
necessary, using
Configure > Services
web page. Make sure to
click the Apply All button
after making any
changes.
2
Check MPM health and
allocation of resources.
Have you got enough
MPMs fitted and
operational?
Proceed to next step.
Install more MPMs or try
re-allocating resources
and re-check using the
Modules pane on the
Configure > Services
web page.
3
Check configuration file.
Have you made any
recent changes to the
configuration?
Upload a backup (previously saved) configuration
file, or upload one from another unit performing a
similar function, using the Restore Standard
Configuration From File option on the Configure >
Save-Load web page. If this fails to restore
operation, call a Service Engineer.
8.5.9
MPM1 Transcoder Card Alarms
8.5.9.1
Alarm Handling
The MPM1 Transcoder Card provides the following alarms back to the Host card:

8-12
Loss of video (from any source)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding

Loss of audio (from any source)

Loss of VBI data

Invalid Parameter (indicating which area video/audio/VBI/ANC data)

Critical alarm (card has malfunctioned, internal log holds nature of failure)

Over temperature (including a warning level as well as an critical level)
All masking of alarms is handled by the Host card.
8.5.9.2
Self-monitoring
The MPM1 endeavors to self monitor itself for correct operation and correct any
inconsistencies it finds. This includes the resetting of malfunctioning sub-systems or
the whole card if necessary. The module attempts to maintain correct operation to
minimize the effects of faults. All such actions are reported through the
alarms/status/logging back to the host card.
8.5.9.3
Module Responses
The Host card monitors all responses back from the module and resets the module
if appropriate. This includes initiating redundancy switches if this results in limiting
the error period. All actions are logged by the Host card.
8.5.9.4
Manual Response to Alarms
Certain alarm conditions will require manual intervention from the user. This may
occasionally mean the need to know which MPM1 encoder card is performing the
transcode of any particular service.
To assist the user, the Ericsson SPR1100 has a Configuration Report page. This
allows the user to see the mapping of services to cards.
8.6
SNMP Traps
8.6.1
What Is An SNMP Trap?
This feature enables a management station to be notified of significant events
(including alarm events) by sending an SNMP message to a specified IP address. If
you have a large number of devices, it may be impractical to poll or request
information from every device. This feature enables each ‘agent’ on the managed
device to notify the manager without solicitation. It does this by sending a message
known as a ‘trap’ of the event.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
8-13
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
When the SNMP trap is received, the management station displays it and the
manager can choose to take an action based on the event, perhaps by polling the
agent directly, or by polling other associated device agents to obtain a better
understanding of the event. Trap-directed notification can result in substantial
savings of network and agent resources by eliminating the need for numerous
SNMP requests.
8.6.2
Using SNMP Traps
SNMP functionality on the SPR1100 is enabled or disabled using the web GUI
Configure > System > SNMP web page. Up to five IP addresses can be assigned
for any SNMP trap message to be sent. The default is 000.000.000.000, which
causes SNMP traps to be sent to the last SNMP master. See Chapter 5, Web GUI
Control for details of this function.
Figure 8.3 SNMP Trap Server Specification
From this web page you can set other SNMP control parameters, including which
SNMP traps are generated, see Figure 8.4.
Figure 8.4 SNMP Trap Levels
The list of currently active alarms can also be accessed via the front panel. The list
of SNMP IP Addresses can also be accessed via the Config > Device Info web
page.
8-14
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.6.2.1
Supported Protocols
SNMP versions 1, 2c and 3 are supported, primarily for alarm trap handling. The
General Ericsson MIB is also supported.
Note:
8.6.2.2
The unit does not support control via SNMP, all remote control is via HTTP
or HTTPS.
SNMP Interface Parameters
Table 8.9 SNMP Interface Parameters
8.7
Parameter
Description
SNMP Read Community
The SNMP community name for read access. default =
public
SNMP Location
Textual description of the location of the unit
SNMP Contact
Name of the person responsible for this unit
SNMP Trap Community
The SNMP community name for read access. default =
private
SNMP Trap Destination
The destination IP address for SNMP trap messages. Up
to five destinations can be defined, but by default none
are assigned
SNMP Trap Alarm Level
Defines what events trigger the generation of an SNMP
trap message. The options are: Start Messages Only,
i.e. only system start up events. Fail and Start
Messages only i.e. start-up events and critical alarms
and All traps i.e. start-up events and all alarms and
warnings.
Viewing Log Files
The event log is stored on the unit Host Controller Card (HCC). A log file is
generated with a file format as defined by RFC3164. When the log has filled the
space allocated to it, the oldest entries in the log file are over-written.
Logged events include power-on, power on self test (POST) results, warning and
alarm assertions and de-assertions, user log ins and log outs. Each event has a
Universal Time Code (UTC) time and date stamp appended to it, with a time
resolution of one second. Any changes to the time and date are recorded in the
system log.
The system log can be exported as a comma separated list, so that it is easy to
import it in to a spreadsheet, where it can be easily filtered or sorted. For details of
the logs web page, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control.
In the event of problems with your unit, Ericsson Customer Support may request
that you supply a copy of the unit logs to assist with the repair of your unit.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
8-15
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
To access the logs:
1. From the web GUI, select the Support > View Logs web page. This page
provide several links to all your log files.
Figure 8.5 Viewing Logs
2. Right-click on the relevant link (as requested by Ericsson Customer Support) to
display a context menu and select Save Target As… or Save Link Target
As…, or similar depending on the browser you are using.
3. A dialog will then be displayed prompting you for a file name and a location to
store the file. Save the file to your computer.
4. Attach the file to an email and send your email to Ericsson Customer Support.
8.8
Calling a Service Engineer
If you cannot resolve a problem with your equipment using the information provided
in this chapter, or if you experience technical or operational difficulties, please do not
hesitate to contact us to request assistance.
8-16
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
There is a lot of information you can give us that will enable us to diagnose your
problem swiftly. When contacting us please provide the following:

Serial number. To obtain this, click the About button on any web GUI page.

Software version number. To obtain this, click the About button on any web GUI
page or view the front panel System > Versions screen.

Configuration, both hardware and software. To obtain a copy of your current
configuration, go to the Configure > Save-Load web page and obtain an XML
file.

Unit logs, if relevant. To obtain these, go to the Support > View Logs web
page.

System architecture and environment.

Description of the symptoms and what diagnosis and tests have already been
attempted.

Any external events that may be related as triggers of the symptoms. If so, at
what local time?

Wireshark IP captures, if relevant.

System logs from any controlling application software, if relevant.
In addition to the above, please do not forget to provide us with your contact details
to enable us to get in touch with you swiftly:
8.9

Name(s).

Telephone and fax numbers.

Email address.

Business address.
Disposing of This Equipment
Dispose of this equipment safely at the end of its life. Local codes and/or
environmental restrictions may affect its disposal. Regulations, policies and/or
environmental restrictions differ throughout the world. Contact your local jurisdiction
or local authority for specific advice on disposal.
See Annex B, Technical Specification for further details.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
8-17
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
BLANK
8-18
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A Glossary
Annex A
The following list covers most of the abbreviations, acronyms and terms as used in
Ericsson Manuals, User and Reference Guides. All terms may not be included in
this Reference Guide.
m
Micrometer (former name - micron): a unit of length equal to one
millionth (10-6) of a meter.
1000BaseT
The term for the Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface. This is the
most common interface for Gigabit Ethernet. Most Gigabit-enabled
PCs and equipment use this interface.
3:2 pull-down
A technique used when converting film material (which operates at
24 pictures per second) to 525-line video (operating at 30 pictures
per second).
4:2:0
Digital video coding method in which the color difference signals are
sampled on alternate lines at half the luminance rate.
4:2:2
Digital video coding method in which the color difference signals are
sampled on all lines at half the luminance rate.
422P@ML
422 Profile at Main Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which
supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to 50
Mbps over various mediums. Used for Contribution and Distribution
applications.
5B6B
5 Binary Bits Encoded to 6 Binary Bits: Block code.
ABR
Adaptive Bit Rate.
ADPCM
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation: An advanced PCM
technique that converts analogue sound into digital data and vice
versa. Instead of coding an absolute measurement at each sample
point, it codes the difference between samples and can dynamically
switch the coding scale to compensate for variations in amplitude
and frequency.
ACC
Authorization Control Computer.
ADT
Audio, Data And Teletext.
AFC
Automatic Frequency Control.
AFS
Automation File Server.
AGC
Automatic Gain Control.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A-1
Glossary
A-2
AMOL I and II
Automatic Measure of Line-ups I and II: Used by automated
equipment to measure programme-viewing ratings.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol used to "resolve" IP
addresses into underlying Ethernet MAC addresses.
ASI
Asynchronous Serial Interface.
ASIC
Application-Specific Integrated Circuit: A customized chip designed
to perform a specific function.
Async
Asynchronous.
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode: A connection orientated, cell based,
data transport technology designed for Broadband ISDN (B-ISDN).
It provides a circuit-switched bandwidth-on-demand carrier system,
with the flexibility of packet switching. It offers low end-to-end delays
and (negotiable on call set up) Quality of Service guarantees.
Asynchronous refers to the sporadic nature of the data being
transmitted. Cells are transmitted only when data is to be sent,
therefore the time interval between cells varies according to the
availability of data.
ATSC
Advanced Television Standards Committee: An organization
founded in 1983 to research and develop a digital TV standard for
the U.S.A. In late 1996, the FCC adopted the ATSC standard, the
digital counterpart of the NTSC standard.
B3ZS
Bipolar with Three Zero Substitution: A method of eliminating long
zero strings in a transmission. It is used to ensure a sufficient
number of transitions to maintain system synchronization when the
user data stream contains an insufficient number of 1s to do so.
B3ZS is the North American equivalent of the European HDB3.
Backward
Compatibility
Refers to hardware or software that is compatible with earlier
versions.
BAT
Bouquet Association Table: Part of the service information data. The
BAT provides information about bouquets. It gives the name of the
bouquet and a list of associated services.
baud rate
The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises
information symbols that may consist of a number of possible states.
Equivalent to bit rate when the symbols only have two states (1 and
0). Measured in Baud.
BER
Bit Error Rate: A measure of transmission quality. The rate at which
errors occur in the transmission of data bits over a link. It is
generally shown as a negative exponent, (e.g., 10-7 means that 1 in
10,000,000 bits are in error).
BISS
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System: Non-proprietary encryption
from EBU (Tech3290).
Bit rate
The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises two logic
states, 1 and 0. Measured in bit/s.
Block; Pixel Block
An 8-row by 8-column matrix of luminance sample values, or 64
DCT coefficients (source, quantized, or de-quantized).
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Glossary
Bouquet
A collection of services (TV, radio, and data, or any combination of
the three) grouped and sold together, and identified in the SI as a
group. A single service may be in several bouquets.
B-Picture; B-Frame
Bi-directionally Predictive Coded Picture/Frame: A picture that is
coded using motion-compensated prediction from previous I or P
frames (forward prediction) and/or future I or P frames (backward
prediction). B frames are not used in any prediction.
BPSK
Binary Phase Shift Keying: A data modulation technique.
Buffer
A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow.
BW
Bandwidth: The transmission capacity of an electronic line such as
(among others) a communications network, computer bus, or
broadcast link. It is expressed in bits per second, bytes per second
or in Hertz (cycles per second). When expressed in Hertz, the
frequency may be a greater number than the actual bits per second,
because the bandwidth is the difference between the lowest and
highest frequencies transmitted. High bandwidth allows fast
transmission or high-volume transmission.
Byte-mode
Each byte is delivered separately in the ASI transport stream, with
stuffing data added between the Bytes to increase the data rate to
270 Mbps. See DVB Document A010 rev. 1, Section B3.3, (ASI)
Layer-2 Transport Protocol.
CA
Conditional Access: The technology used to control the access to
viewing services to authorized subscribers through the transmission
of encrypted signals and the programmable regulation of their
decryption by a system such as viewing cards.
CAT
Conditional Access Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific
Information (PSI) data. Mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance if CA is
in use.
C-Band
The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, which spans the
frequency range of approximately 4 GHz to 6 GHz. Used by
communications satellites. Preferred in tropical climates because it
is not susceptible to fading.
CCIR
See: ITU-R.
CCITT
See: ITU-T.
Channel
a narrow range of frequencies, part of a frequency band, for the
transmission of radio and television signals without interference from
other channels.
In the case of OFDM, a large number of carriers spaced apart at
precise frequencies are allocated to a channel.
Channel Coding
A way of encoding data in a communications channel that adds
patterns of redundancy into the transmission path in order to
improve the error rate. Such methods are widely used in wireless
communications.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A-3
Glossary
A-4
Chrominance
The color part of a TV picture signal, relating to the hue and
saturation but not to the luminance (brightness) of the signal. In a
composite-coded color system, the color information (chrominance,
often referred to as chroma) is modulated onto a high frequency
carrier and added to the monochrome-format video signal carrying
the luminance (Y). In a component-coded color system, the two
color-difference signals (R-Y)(B-Y) usually referred to as CRCB
(digital) or PRPB (analogue), are used to convey color information.
When CRCB (PRPB) is added to the luminance (Y), the complete
picture information is conveyed as YCRCB (YPRPB).
Closed Captioning
A TV picture subtitling system used with 525-line analogue
transmissions.
CODE
Create Once Distribute Everywhere.
Codec
The combination of an Encoder and a complementary Decoder
located respectively at the input and output of a transmission path.
COFDM
Coded OFDM: COFDM adds forward error correction to the OFDM
transmission consisting of Reed-Solomon (RS) coding followed by
convolutional coding to add extra bits to the transmitted signal. This
allows a large number of errors at the receive end to be corrected by
convolutional (Viterbi) decoding followed by RS decoding.
Composite
CVBS Video Signal, 1 V pk-pk
Compression
Reduction in the number of bits used to represent the same
information. For the purposes of a broadcast system, it is the
process of reducing digital picture information by discarding
redundant portions of information that are not required when
reconstituting the picture to produce viewing clarity. Compression
allows a higher bite-rate to be transmitted through a given
bandwidth.
Compression
System
Responsible for compressing and multiplexing the video / audio /
data bitstreams, together with the authorization stream. The
multiplexed data stream is then ready for transmission.
C RC B
Digital Color difference signals. These signals, in combination with
the luminance signal (Y), define the color and brightness of each
picture element (pixel) on a TV line. See: Chrominance
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check: A mathematical algorithm that computes
a numerical value based on the bits in a block of data. This number
is transmitted with the data and the receiver uses this information
and the same algorithm to ensure the accurate delivery of data by
comparing the results of algorithm and the number received. If a
mismatch occurs, an error in transmission is presumed.
CVBS
Color Video Black Sync Signal
dB
Decibels: A ratio of one quantity to another using logarithmic scales
to give results related to human aural or visual perception. dB is a
ratio whereas dBm, for example, is an absolute value, quoted as a
ratio to a fixed point of 0 dBm. 0 dBm is 1 mW at 1 kHz terminated
in 600Ω. 0 dBmV is 1 mV terminated in 75Ω.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Glossary
DCE
Data Communications Equipment: Typically a modem. It
establishes, maintains and terminates a session on a network but in
itself is not the source (originator) or destination (end receiving unit)
of signals (e.g. a computer, see DTE). A DCE device may also
convert signals to comply with the transmission path (network)
format.
DCT
Discrete Cosine Transform: A technique for expressing a waveform
as a weighted sum of cosines. Raw video data is not readily
compressible. DCT is not in itself a compression technique but is
used to process the video data so that it is compressible by an
encoder. DCT processes the picture on an 8x8-pixel block basis,
converting the data from an uncompressible X Y form (as displayed
by an oscilloscope) to a compressible frequency domain form (as
displayed by a spectrum analyzer). Can be forward DCT or inverse
DCT.
DDS
Direct Digital Synthesiser.
Decoder
The unit containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode
encrypted signals. Some Decoders are separate from the receiver
but in satellite TV broadcasting, the term is often used
interchangeably as a name for an Integrated Receiver Decoder
(IRD). The term IRD, or IRD / Decoder, is usually associated with
satellite TV broadcasting while Cable systems are based on
Converters or on Set-Top Boxes / Converters.
Decoding Time
stamp
A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates
the time that an access unit is to be decoded in the system target
Decoder.
DENG
Digital Electronic News Gathering
DID
Data Identifier.
Differential Coding
Method of coding using the difference between the value of a
sample and a predicted value.
DiffServ
Differentiated Services. A mechanism used on layer 3 - e.g. the IP
layer - to differentiate between traffic of various types. DiffServ is
based on the ToS field and provides a mechanism for the network to
give e.g. video traffic higher priority than other traffic (for example
Internet traffic).
DIL
Dual In Line: The most common type of package for small and
medium scale integrated circuits. The pins hang vertically from the
two long sides of the rectangular package, spaced at intervals of 0.1
inch.
DIN
Deutsches Institut für Normung: German Standards Institute.
Downlink
The part of the satellite communications circuit that extends from the
satellite to an Earth station.
Downconvert
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream
is shifted to a lower frequency range.
DPCM
Differential Pulse Code Modulation: An audio digitization technique
that codes the difference between samples rather than coding an
absolute measurement at each sample point.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A-5
Glossary
DSNG
Digital Satellite News-Gathering.
DSP
Digital Signal Processor.
DTE
Data circuit Terminating Equipment: A communications device that
originates (is the source) or is the end receiving unit (destination) of
signals on a network. It is typically a terminal or computer.
DTH
Direct-To-Home. The term used to describe uninterrupted
transmission from the satellite directly to the subscriber, that is, no
intermediary cable or terrestrial network utilized.
DTMF
Dual-Tone MultiFrequency
DVB
Digital Video Broadcasting: A European project which has defined
transmission standards for digital broadcasting systems using
satellite (DVB-S), cable (DVB-C) and terrestrial (DVB-T) medium,
created by the EP-DVB group and approved by the ITU. Specifies
modulation, error correction, etc. (see EN 300 421 for satellite,
EN 300 429 for cable and EN 300 744 for terrestrial).
DVB SI
Digital Video Broadcasting Service Information.
DVB-PI
DVB-Professional Interfaces: TTV Lan search shows – DVB
Physical Interfaces
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. A mechanism to utilize
existing fiber with even more bandwidth by adding extra signals
using other wavelengths/colors
Earth
Technical Earth: Ensures that all equipment chassis within a rack
are at the same potential, usually by connecting a wire between the
Technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack. This is
sometimes known as a Functional earth.
Protective Earth: Used for electric shock protection. This is
sometimes known as a safety earth.
EBU
European Broadcast Union.
ECM
Entitlement Control Message.
EDI
Ethernet Data Input
EIA
Electronics Industries Association (USA).
EIT
Event Information Table: Equipment: A component of the DVBService Information (SI) stream generated within an Encoder,
containing information about events or programmes such as event
name, start time, duration, etc.
System: EIT (Present/Following) contains the name of the current
and next event. It may include an optional descriptor (synopsis)
giving brief details of content. EIT (Schedule) is used to produce a
full EPG. The EIT is the only DVB-SI table, which can be encrypted.
A-6
Elementary Stream
A generic term for a coded bitstream, be it video, audio or other.
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility.
EMM
Entitlement Management Message.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Glossary
Encryption
Encoding of a transmission to prevent access without the
appropriate decryption equipment and authorization.
EPG
Electronic Programme Guide: On-screen programme listing using
thumbnail pictures and/or text.
Ethernet
The most widely used local area network (LAN) defined by the IEEE
as the 802.3 standard. Transmission speeds vary according to the
configuration. Ethernet uses copper or fiber-optic cables.
ETS
European Telecommunications Standard.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
FBAS
German for CVBS
FCC
Federal Communications Commission.
FDM
Frequency Division Multiplex: A common communication channel for
a number of signals, each with its own allotted frequency.
FEC
Forward Error Correction: A method of catching errors in a
transmission. The data is processed through an algorithm that adds
extra bits and sends these with the transmitted data. The extra bits
are then used at the receiving end to check the accuracy of the
transmission and correct any errors.
FFT
Fast Fourier Transformation: A fast algorithm for performing a
discrete Fourier transform.
FIFO
First In, First Out: A data structure or hardware buffer from which
items are taken out in the same order they were put in. Also known
as a shelf from the analogy with pushing items onto one end of a
shelf so that they fall off the other. A FIFO is useful for buffering a
stream of data between a sender and receiver that are not
synchronized - i.e. they not sending and receiving at exactly the
same rate.
FM
Frequency Modulation: Analogue modulation procedure
Footprint
The area of the Earth’s surface covered by a satellite’s downlink
transmission. Also (generally) the area from which the satellite can
receive uplink transmissions.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol: A protocol used to transfer files over a
TCP/IP network (Internet, UNIX, etc.). For example, after developing
the HTML pages for a Web site on a local machine, they are
typically uploaded to the Web server, using FTP. Unlike e-mail
programs in which graphics and program files have to be attached,
FTP is designed to handle binary files directly and does not add the
overhead of encoding and decoding the data.
G.703
The ITU-T standard which defines the physical and electrical
characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces.
GOP
Group of Pictures: MPEG video compression works more effectively
by processing a number of video frames as a block. The Ericsson
AB Encoder normally uses a 12 frame GOP; every twelfth frame is
an I frame.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A-7
Glossary
A-8
GUI
Graphical User Interface: The use of pictures rather than just words
to represent the input and output of a program. A program with a
GUI runs under a windowing system and has a screen interface
capable of displaying graphics in the form of icons, drop-down
menus and a movable pointer. The on-screen information is usually
controlled / manipulated by a mouse or keyboard.
HDTV
High Definition Television.
HPA
High Power Amplifier: Used in the signal path to amplify the
modulated and up-converted broadcast signal for feeding to the
uplink antenna.
HSYNC
Horizontal (line) SYNCs.
HTTP
HyperText Transfer Protocol. The fundamental protocol used on the
Internet for transmission of WEB pages and other data between
servers and PCs
HU
Height Unit
Hub
A device in a multi-point network at which branch nodes
interconnect.
ICAM
Integrated Conditional Access Module: Embedded in the IRD and
responsible for descrambling, plus packet filtering and reception. It
also contains the physical interface to the subscriber’s viewing card.
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol. ICMP messages, delivered in IP
packets, are used for out-of-band messages related to network
operation or mis-operation
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol. IGMP is a protocol used to
manage multicasts on the Internet. For a host (receiver unit) to
receive a multicast, it needs to transmit IGMP "join" messages on
the right format. Three versions exist. IGMPv2 is common today but
IGMPv3 is the next step.
IDU
Indoor unit
IEC
International Electrotechnical Committee.
IF
Intermediate Frequency: Usually refers to the 70 MHz or 140 MHz
output of the Modulator in cable, satellite and terrestrial transmission
applications.
Interframe Coding
Compression coding involving consecutive frames. When
consecutive frames are compared, temporal redundancy is used to
remove common elements (information) and arrive at difference
information. MPEG-2 uses B and P frames, but since they are
individually incomplete and relate to other adjacent frames, they
cannot be edited independently.
Intraframe Coding
Compression coding involving a single frame. Redundant
information is removed on a per frame basis. All other frames are
ignored. Coding of a macroblock or picture that uses information
only from that macroblock or picture. Exploits spatial redundancy by
using DCT to produce I frames; these are independent frames and
can be edited.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Glossary
IP
Internet Protocol: The IP part of TCP/IP. IP implements the network
layer (layer 3) of the protocol, which contains a network address and
is used to route a message to a different network or sub-network. IP
accepts packets from the layer 4 transport protocol (TCP or UDP),
adds its own header to it and delivers a datagram to the layer 2 data
link protocol. It may also break the packet into fragments to support
the Maximum Transmission / Transfer Unit (MTU) of the network.
I-picture; I-frame
Intracoded Picture/Frame: A picture / frame, which is coded using
purely intracoding with reference to no other field or frame
information. The I frame is used as a reference for other
compression methods.
IPPV
Impulse Pay Per View: One-time events, purchased at home (on
impulse) using a prearranged SMS credit line.
IRD
Integrated Receiver Decoder: The Receiver with an internal MPEG
Decoder, which is connected to the subscriber’s TV. The IRD is
responsible for receiving and de-multiplexing all signals. The unit
receives the incoming signal and if CA is active, decodes the signal
when provided with a control word by the viewing card. Domestic
IRDs are also known as Set-Top Units or Set-Top Boxes.
IRE
Institute of Radio Engineers: No longer in existence but the name
lives on as a unit of video amplitude measurement. This unit is 1%
of the range between blanking a peak white for a standard
amplitude signal.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network: The basic ISDN service is BRI
(Basic Rate Interface), which is made up of two 64 kbps B channels
and one 16 kbps D channel (2B+D). If both channels are combined
into one, called bonding, the total data rate becomes 128 kbps and
is four and a half times the bandwidth of a V.34 modem (28.8 kbps).
The ISDN high speed service is PRI (Primary Rate Interface). It
provides 23 B channels and one 64 kbps D channel (23B+D), which
is equivalent to the 24 channels of a T1 line. When several channels
are bonded together, high data rates can be achieved. For example,
it is common to bond six channels for quality videoconferencing at
384 kbps. In Europe, PRI includes 30 B channels and one D
channel, equivalent to an E1 line.
ISO
International Standards Organisation.
ISOG
Inter-union Satellite Operations Group.
ITS
Insertion Test Signal: A suite of analogue test signals placed on
lines in the VBI. Also known as VITS.
ITT
Invitation To Tender.
ITU-R
International Telecommunications Union - Radiocommunications
Study Groups (was CCIR).
ITU-T
International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications
Standardization Sector (was CCITT).
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A-9
Glossary
A-10
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group: ISO/ITU standard for
compressing still images. It has a high compression capability.
Using discrete cosine transform, it provides user specified
compression ratios up to around 100:1 (there is a trade-off between
image quality and file size).
kbps
1000 bits per second.
Kbit
1024 bits, usually refers to memory capacity or allocation.
Ku-band
The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, which spans the
frequency range of approximately 12 GHz to 14 GHz. Used by
communications satellites. Preferred for DTH applications because
this range of frequency is less susceptible to interference.
LAN
Local Area Network: A network, which provides facilities for
communications within a defined building or group of buildings in
close proximity.
L-band
The frequency band from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz, which is the
normal input-frequency-range of a domestic IRD. The incoming
signal from the satellite is down-converted to L-band by the LNB.
LED
Light Emitting Diode.
LNB
Low Noise Block Down-Converter: The component of a subscriber
satellite transmission receiving dish which amplifies the incoming
signal and down-converts it to a suitable frequency to input to the
IRD (typically 950 MHz - 1600 MHz).
LO
Local Oscillator.
lsb
Least significant bit.
Luminance
The television signal representing brightness, or the amount of light
at any point in a picture. The Y in YCRCB.
LVDS
Low Voltage Differential Signal: LVDS is a generic multi-purpose
Interface standard for high speed / low power data transmission. It
was standardized in ANSI/TIA/EIA-644-1995 Standard (aka RS644).
Macroblock
A 16x16-pixel area of the TV picture. Most processing within the
MPEG domain takes place with macro blocks. These are converted
to four 8x8 blocks using either frame DCT or field DCT. Four 8 x 8
blocks of luminance data and two (4:2:0 chrominance format), four
(4:2:2) or eight (4:4:4) corresponding 8 x 8 blocks of chrominance
data coming from a 16 x 16 section of the luminance component of
the picture. Macroblock can be used to refer to the sample data and
to the coded representation of the sample values and other data
elements.
Mbps
Million bits per second.
MCC
Multiplex Control Computer: A component of a System 3000
compression system. The MCC sets up the configuration for the
System 3000 Multiplexers under its control. The MCC controls both
the main and backup Multiplexer for each transport stream.
MCPC
Multiple Channels Per Carrier.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Glossary
MEM
Multiplex Element Manager: A GUI-based control system, part of the
range of Ericsson AB compression system control element products.
The evolution 5000 MEM holds a model of the system hardware.
Using this model, it controls the individual system elements to
configure the output multiplexes from the incoming elementary
streams. The MEM monitors the equipment status and controls any
redundancy switching.
Meta-data
Meta-data is descriptive data that is "tagged" to a movie or audio
clip. Meta-data is essential for the broadcaster.
MMDS
Multichannel Microwave Distribution System: A terrestrial microwave
direct-to-home broadcast transmission system.
Motion
Compensation
The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiency of the prediction
of sample values. The prediction uses motion vectors to provide
offsets into the past and/or future reference frames or fields
containing previously decoded sample values that are used to form
the prediction error signal.
Motion Estimation
The process of estimating motion vectors in the encoding process.
Motion Vector
A two-dimensional vector used for motion compensation that
provides an offset from the coordinate position in the current picture
or field to the coordinates in a reference frame or field.
MP@ML
Main Profile at Main Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which
supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to 15
Mbps over various mediums.
MP@HL
Main Profile at High Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which
supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to 80
Mbps over various mediums.
MPEG
Moving Pictures Experts Group: The name of the ISO/IEC working
group which sets up the international standards for digital television
source coding.
MPEG-2
Industry standard for video and audio source coding using
compression and multiplexing techniques to minimize video signal
bit rate in preparation for broadcasting. Specified in ISO/IEC 13818.
The standard is split into layers and profiles defining bit rates and
picture resolutions.
MPLS
Multi-protocol Label Switching. A Quality of Service mechanism for
IP networks that allow IP packets to flow along a predefined path in
a network, improving the reliability and robustness of the
transmission.
MPM
Media Processing Module.
MPTS
Multi-Program Transport Streams. Transport Streams that carry
multiple TV/Radio services.
msb
Most significant bit.
Msymbol/s
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
6
(Msym/s) Mega (million) Symbols per second (10 Symbols per
second).
A-11
Glossary
Multiplex
A number of discrete data streams (typically 8 to 12), from
encoders, that are compressed together in a single DVB compliant
transport stream for delivery to a Modulator.
Multicast
An IP mechanism that allows transmission of data to multiple
receivers. A multicast can also have several transmit sources
simultaneously. In video applications, multicast is typically used to
distribute a video signal from a central source to multiple
destinations.
MUSICAM
Masking pattern adapted Universal Sub-band Integrated Coding
And Multiplexing: An audio bit rate reduction system relying on subband coding and psychoacoustic masking.
Mux
Multiplexer: Transmission Multiplexer: receives EMMs from the
ACC, ECMs from the BCC, video/audio data from the encoders, and
the SI stream from the SIC. It then multiplexes them all into a single
DVB-compliant transport stream, and delivers the signal to the
uplink after modulation.
The Multiplexer also contains the cipher card, which scrambles the
services according to the control words supplied by the BCC.
Network
In the context of broadcasting: a collection of MPEG-2 transport
stream multiplexes transmitted on a single delivery system, for
example, all digital channels on a specific cable system.
NICAM
Near Instantaneously Companded Audio Multiplex: Official name is
NICAM 728. Used for digital stereo sound broadcasting in the UK
employing compression techniques to deliver very near CD quality
audio. 728 refers to the bit rate in kbps.
NIT
Network Information Table: Part of the service information data. The
NIT provides information about the physical organization of each
transport stream multiplex, and the characteristics of the network
itself (such as the actual frequencies and modulation being used).
nm
A-12
-9
Nanometer: a unit of length equal to one thousand millionth (10 ) of
a meter.
NMS
Network Management System. A system used to supervise
elements in an IP network. When a device reports an alarm, the
alarm will be collected by the NMS and reported to the operator.
NMS systems typically collect valuable statistics information about
the network performance and can warn the operator early.
NTSC
National Television Systems Committee: The group, which
developed analogue standards used in television broadcast systems
in the United States. Also adopted in other countries (e.g. Mexico,
Canada, Japan). This system uses 525 picture lines and a 59.97 Hz
field frequency.
NVOD
Near Video On-Demand: Method of offering multiple showings of
movies or events. The showings are timed to start at set intervals,
determined by the broadcaster. Each showing of a movie or event
can be sold to subscribers separately.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Glossary
NVRAM
Non-volatile Random Access Memory: Memory devices (permitting
random read / write access) that do not lose their information when
power is removed. Stores the default configuration parameters set
by the user.
ODU
Outdoor Unit
OFDM
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex: A modulation technique
used for digital TV transmission in Europe, Japan and Australia;
more spectrally efficient than FDM. In OFDM, data is distributed
over a large number of carriers spaced apart at precise frequencies.
The carriers are arranged with overlapping sidebands in such a way
that the signals can be received without adjacent channel
interference.
OPPV
Order ahead Pay Per View: An advance purchase of encrypted onetime events with an expiry date.
OSD
On-screen display: Messages and graphics, typically originating
from the SMS, and displayed on the subscriber’s TV screen by the
IRD, to inform the subscriber of problems or instruct the subscriber
to contact the SMS.
Packet
A unit of data transmitted over a packet switching network. A packet
consists of a header followed by a number of contiguous bytes from
an elementary data stream.
PAL
Phase Alternating Line: A color TV broadcasting system where the
phase of the R-Y color-difference signal is inverted on every
alternate line to average out errors providing consistent color
reproduction.
PAT
Program Association Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific
Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance.
The PAT points (maps) to the PMT.
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation: A process in which a signal is sampled,
each sample is quantized independently of other samples, and the
resulting succession of quantized values is encoded into a digital
signal.
PCR
Program Clock Reference: A time stamp in the transport stream
from which the Decoder timing is derived.
PDC
Program Delivery Control: A Teletext service allowing simple
programming (i.e. VideoPlus) of VCR recording times. If the desired
program is rescheduled, PDC updates the programming information
in the VCR.
Pel
Picture Element: Also known as a pixel. The smallest resolvable
rectangular area of an image either on a screen or stored in
memory. On-screen, pixels are made up of one or more dots of
color. Monochrome and grey-scale systems use one dot per pixel.
For grey-scale, the pixel is energized with different intensities,
creating a range from dark to light (a scale of 0-255 for an eight-bit
pixel). Color systems use a red, green and blue dot per pixel, each
of which is energized to different intensities, creating a range of
colors perceived as the mixture of these dots. If all three dots are
dark, the result is black. If all three dots are bright, the result is
white.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A-13
Glossary
A-14
PES
Packetized Elementary Stream: A sequential stream of data bytes
that has been converted from original elementary streams of audio
and video access units and transported as packets. Each PES
packet consists of a header and a payload of variable length and
subject to a maximum of 64 kbytes. A time stamp is provided by the
MPEG-2 systems layer to ensure correct synchronization between
related elementary streams at the Decoder.
PID
Packet Identifier: the header on a packet in an elementary data
stream, which identifies that data stream. An MPEG-2 / DVB
standard.
PIN
Personal Identification Number: A password used to control access
to programming and to set purchase limits. Each subscriber
household can activate several PINs and may use them to set
individual parental rating or spending limits for each family member.
Pixel
PIX (picture) Element: The digital representation of the smallest
area of a television picture capable of being delineated by the
bit-stream. See Pel for more information.
pk-pk
peak to peak: Measurement of a signal or waveform from its most
negative point to its most positive point.
PLL
Phase-Locked Loop. A phase-locked loop is a control system which
controls the rotation of an object by comparing its rotational position
(phase) with another rotating object as in the case of a sine wave or
other repeating signal. This type of control system can synchronize
not only the speed, but also the angular position of two waveforms
that are not derived from the same source.
PMT
Program Map Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific
Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance.
Each service has a PMT, which lists the component parts
(elementary streams of video, audio, etc.) for the various services
being transmitted.
P-picture/P-frame
A picture / frame produced using forward prediction. It contains
predictions from either previous I frames or previous P frames. The
P frame is used as a reference for future P or B frames.
ppm
Parts per million.
PPV
Pay Per View: A system of payment for viewing services based on a
usage / event basis rather than on on-going subscription.
Subscribers must purchase viewing rights for each PPV event that
they wish to view. PPV events may be purchased as IPPV or OPPV.
Program
PC - A sequence of instructions for a computer.
TV - A concept having a precise definition within ISO 13818-1
(MPEG-2). For a transport stream, the timebase is defined by the
PCR. The use of the PCR for timing information creates a virtual
channel within the stream.
Programme
A linking of one or more events under the control of a broadcaster.
For example, football match, news, film show. In the MPEG-2
concept, the collection of elementary streams comprising the
programme, have a common start and end time. A series of
programmes are referred to as events.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Glossary
PRPB
Analogue Color difference signals. Refer to CRCB for an explanation.
PROM
Programmable Read-Only Memory: A device, which may be written
once with data for permanent storage, and then read whenever
required. Special types of PROM permit the erasure of all data by
Ultraviolet light (EPROM) or by application of an electronic signal
(EEPROM).
PS
Program Stream: A combination of one or more PESs with a
common timebase.
PSI
Program Specific Information: Consists of normative data, which is
necessary for the de-multiplexing of transport streams and the
successful regeneration of programs (see also: SI).
PSIP
Program System Information Protocol: The ATSC equivalent of SI
for DVB.
PSK
Phase Shift Keying: A method of modulating digital signals
particularly suited to satellite transmission.
PSR
Professional Satellite Receiver: See also: IRD.
PSU
Power Supply Unit.
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation: A method of modulating digital
signals, which uses combined techniques of phase modulation and
amplitude modulation. It is particularly suited to cable networks.
QoS
Quality of Service. A common term for a set of parameters
describing the quality you get from an IP network: Throughput,
availability, delay, jitter and packet loss.
QPSK
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying: A form of phase shift keying
modulation using four states.
QSIF
Quarter Screen Image Format.
Quantise
A process of converting analogue waveforms to digital information.
8-bit quantization as set out in ITU-R Rec. 601. Uses 256 levels in
the range 0 – 255 to determine the analogue waveform value at any
given point. The value is then converted to a digital number for
processing in the digital domain.
RAM
Random Access Memory: A volatile storage device for digital data.
Data may be written to, or read from, the device as often as
required. When power is removed, the data it contains is lost.
RAS
Remote Authorization System: An Ericsson AB proprietary publickey encryption system used to prevent unauthorized viewing of a TV
programme or programmes.
Reflex™
An Ericsson AB proprietary system to provide efficient use of
bandwidth by a set of encoders without sacrificing picture quality. A
group bit rate is allocated to a set of Encoders and the bit rate for
each Encoder is allocated according to the requirements of the
picture encoding process.
RF
Radio Frequency.
RGB
Red, Green, Blue: The Chroma information in a video signal.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A-15
Glossary
A-16
RIP2
Routing Information Protocol v2. A protocol used between network
routers to exchange routing tables and information.
ROM
Read Only Memory: A non-volatile storage device for digital data.
Data has been stored permanently in this device. No further
information may be stored (written) there and the data it holds
cannot be erased. Data may be read as often as required.
RS
Reed-Solomon coding: An error detection and correction, coding
system. 16 bytes of Reed-Solomon Forward Error Correction code
are appended to the packet before transmission bringing the packet
length to 204 bytes. The 16 bytes are used at the receiving end to
correct any errors. Up to eight corrupted bytes can be corrected.
RSVP
ReSerVation Protocol. A Quality-of-service oriented protocol used
by network elements to reserve capacity in an IP network before a
transmission takes place.
RTP
Real-time Transfer Protocol. A protocol designed for transmission of
real-time data like video and audio over IP networks. RTP is used
for most video over IP transmissions.
RLC
Run Length Coding: Minimization of the length of a bit-stream by
replacing repeated characters with an instruction of the form ‘repeat
character x y times’.
SBR
Spectral Band Replication.
SCPC
Single Channel Per Carrier.
Spectral
Scrambling
A process (in digital transmission) used to combine a digital signal
with a pseudo-random sequence, producing a randomized digital
signal that conveys the original information in a form optimized for a
broadcast channel.
Scrambling
Alteration of the characteristics of a television signal in order to
prevent unauthorized reception of the information in clear form.
SDI
Serial Digital Interface.
SDT
Service Description Table: Provides information in the SI stream
about the services in the system; for example, the name of the
service, the service provider, etc.
SDTI
Serial Data Transport Interface. A mechanism that allows
transmission of various types of data over an SDI signal. This may
be one or more compressed video signals or other proprietary data
types. The advantage of SDTI is that existing SDI transmission
infrastructure can be used to transport other types of data.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage (EN 60950).
SFP
Small Form-factor Pluggable module. A standardized mechanism to
allow usage of various optical interfaces for Gigabit Ethernet.
Several types of SFP modules exist: Single-mode fiber modules for
long-distance transmission and multi-mode fiber modules for shorter
distances. SFP is also known as "mini-GBIC".
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Glossary
SIP
Session Initiation Protocol. A common acronym for the ongoing
effort to standardize signaling over IP networks, i.e. connection
set-up and tear-down. SIP makes it possible to "dial" a remote
receiver of data and set-up the connection in this way.
STB
Set-Top Box: A box that sits on top of a television set and is the
interface between the home television and the cable TV company.
New technologies evolving for set-top boxes are video-on-demand,
video games, educational services, database searches, and home
shopping. The cable equivalent of the IRD.
SFN
Single Frequency Network: The SFN technique allows large
geographic areas to be served with a common transmission
multiplex. All transmitters in the network are synchronously
modulated with the same signal and they all radiate on the same
frequency. Due to the multi-path capability of the multi-carrier
transmission system (COFDM), signals from several transmitters
arriving at a receiving antenna may contribute constructively to the
total wanted signal. The SFN technique is not only frequency
efficient but also power efficient because fades in the field strength
of one transmitter may be filled by another transmitter.
SI
Service Information: Digital information describing the delivery
system, content and scheduling (timing) of broadcast data streams.
DVB-SI data provides information to enable the IRD to automatically
demultiplex and decode the various streams of programmes within
the multiplex. Specified in ISO/IEC 13818[1]. (DVB)
Single Packet Burst A burst of ASI bytes (either 188 or 204, depending on packet length)
is contiguously grouped into an MPEG-2 transport stream packet.
Mode
Stuffing data is added between the packets to increase the data rate
to 270 Mbps. See DVB Document A010 rev. 1, Section B3.3, (ASI)
Layer-2 Transport Protocol.
Smart Card
A plastic card with a built-in microprocessor and memory used for
identification, financial transactions or other authorizing data
transfer. When inserted into a reader, data is transferred to and from
the host machine or a central computer. It is more secure than a
magnetic stripe card and it can be disabled if the wrong password is
entered too many times. As a financial transaction card, it can be
loaded with digital money and used in the same way as cash until
the balance reaches zero. The file protocol is specific to its intended
application.
SMATV
Satellite Mast Antenna Television: A distribution system, which
provides sound and television signals to the households of a
building or group of buildings, typically used to refer to an apartment
block.
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A-17
Glossary
SMS
Subscriber Management System: A system which handles the
maintenance, billing, control and general supervision of subscribers
to conditional access technology viewing services provided through
cable and satellite broadcasting. An SMS can be an automatic (e.g.
Syntellect) system where subscribers order entitlements by entering
information via a telephone. Alternatively, an SMS can be a manual
system, which requires subscribers to speak with an operator who
then manually enters their entitlement requests. Some systems
support multiple SMSs.
SNG
Satellite News-Gathering.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol is an Internet protocol used to
synchronize the clocks of computers to some time reference. It is a
simplified version of the protocol NTP protocol which is too
complicated for many systems.
Spatial Redundancy Information repetition due to areas of similar luminance and/or
chrominance characteristics within a single frame. Removed using
DCT and Quantization (Intra-Frame Coding).
A-18
SPI
Synchronous Parallel Interface.
Statistical
Redundancy
Data tables are used to assign fewer bits to the most commonly
occurring events, thereby reducing the overall bit rate. Removed
using Run Length Coding and Variable Length Coding.
TAXI
Transparent Asynchronous Tx / Rx Interface: A proprietary high
speed data interface.
TCP / IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol: A set of
communications protocols that may be used to connect different
types of computers over networks.
TDM
Time Division Multiplex: One common, communications channel
carrying a number of signals, each with its own allotted time slot.
TDT
Time and Date Table: Part of the DVB Service Information. The TDT
gives information relating to the present time and date.
Temporal
Redundancy
Information repetition due to areas of little or no movement between
successive frames. Removed using motion estimation and
compensation (Inter-Frame Coding).
Time stamp
A term that indicates the time of a specific action such as the arrival
of a byte or the presentation of a presentation unit.
TNS
Temporal Noise Shaping.
TOT
Time Offset Table: This optional SI table supports the use of local
offsets as well as the UTC time/date combination. The purpose of
the table is to list by country the current offset from UTC and the
next expected change to that offset (to track when daylight saving
occurs). The offset resolution is to within 1 minute over a range of
12 hours from UTC.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Glossary
Transport Stream
A set of packetized elementary data streams and SI streams, which
may comprise more than one programme, but with common
synchronization and error protection. The data structure is defined in
ISO/IEC 13818-1 [1] and is the basis of the ETSI Digital Video
Broadcasting standards.
Transport Stream
Packet Header
A data structure used to convey information about the transport
stream payload.
TS
Transport Stream.
TSDT
Transport Stream Descriptor Table: A component of the MPEG-2
PSI data. This table describes which type of Transport stream it is in
(i.e. DVB, ATSC etc.). It may also contain other descriptors.
TSP
Transport Stream Processor.
U
44.45 mm (rack height standard).
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter: A device providing a
serial interface for transmitting and receiving data.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. A protocol above the IP layer that provides
port multiplexing in addition. In essence, you can transmit IP data
packets to several receiving processes in the same unit/device.
Unicast
Point-to-point connection, i.e. the "opposite" of multicast which is
one to many (or many to many). In this mode, a transmit unit sends
video data direct to a unique destination address.
Upconvert
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream
is shifted to a higher frequency range.
Uplink
The part of the communications satellite circuit that extends from the
Earth to the satellite.
UPS
Uninterruptable Power Supply: A method of supplying backup power
when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage
level. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes;
enough to power down the computer in an orderly manner. This is
particularly important where write back cache is used. Write back
cache is where modified data intended for the disk is temporarily
stored in RAM and can be lost in the event of a power failure.
Sophisticated systems are tied to electrical generators that can
provide power for days. UPS systems typically provide surge
suppression and may provide voltage regulation.
UTC
Universal Time Code: An internationally agreed basis for
timekeeping introduced in 1972 and based on international atomic
time (corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time or GMT).
VCM
Video Compression Module.
VITC
Vertical Interval Time Code.
VITS
Vertical Interval Test Signal: See: ITS.
VLAN
Virtual LAN, a network of units that behave as if they are connected
to the same wire even though they may actually be physically
located on different segments of a LAN.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A-19
Glossary
A-20
VPS
Video Programming System: A German precursor to PDC
WSS
Wide Screen Switching: Data used in wide-screen analogue
services, which enables a receiver to select the appropriate picture
display mode.
WST
World System Teletext: System B Teletext. Used in 625 line / 50 Hz
television systems
(ITU-R 653).
XILINX
A type of programmable Integrated Circuit.
XLR
Audio connector featuring three leads, two for signal and one for
GND.
XML
eXtensible Markup Language. A very common self-describing textbased data format. Used for many purposes: Meta-data,
configuration files, documents, etc. The readability of the format has
made it very popular and is now the fundament for many types of
WEB services.
XPO
The name given to the second generation Ericsson standard for web
pages and additional supporting interfaces.
Y (Luminance)
Defines the brightness of a particular point on a TV line. The only
signal required for black and white pictures.
Y/C
Broadcast video with separate color, Y (luminance) and C (Chroma)
(sometimes called S-Video).
YUV
Y: Luminance component (Brightness), U and V: Chrominance
(Color difference)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
B Technical Specification
Annex B
Contents
B.1 B.2 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 B.3 B.3.1 B.3.2 B.3.3 B.3.4 B.4 B.4.1 B.4.2 B.5 B.5.1 B.5.2 B.6 B.6.1 B.6.2 B.7 B.7.1 B.7.2 B.7.3 B.7.4 B.7.5 B.7.6 B.7.7 B.7.8 B.7.8.1 B.7.8.2 B.7.9 B.7.9.1 B.7.9.2 B.7.10 B.7.11 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
IP Output Transport Stream .................................................................B-3 Control Ethernet Specification ..............................................................B-3 Overview...............................................................................................B-3 IP Parameters.......................................................................................B-4 MAC Address .......................................................................................B-4 Data Ethernet Specification ..................................................................B-4 Overview...............................................................................................B-4 Data Port Parameters ...........................................................................B-5 IP Parameters.......................................................................................B-5 MAC Address .......................................................................................B-5 Media Processing Module (SPR/HWO/MPM1) ....................................B-5 Overview...............................................................................................B-5 Video Formats ......................................................................................B-6 Environmental.......................................................................................B-8 Conditions.............................................................................................B-8 Physical ................................................................................................B-8 Power Supply .......................................................................................B-9 AC Mains Input .....................................................................................B-9 DC Input .............................................................................................B-10 Compliance.........................................................................................B-10 Safety .................................................................................................B-10 EMC....................................................................................................B-11 Telecommunications...........................................................................B-11 CE Marking.........................................................................................B-11 C-Tick Mark ........................................................................................B-12 Packaging Statement .........................................................................B-12 Packaging Markings ...........................................................................B-12 Materials Declarations ........................................................................B-13 For the European Union .....................................................................B-13 For China............................................................................................B-13 Equipment Disposal............................................................................B-14 General...............................................................................................B-14 For the European Union .....................................................................B-14 Lithium Batteries.................................................................................B-14 Recycling ............................................................................................B-15 B-1
Technical Specification
List of Tables
Table B.1 IP Output Transport Stream ................................................................. B-3 Table B.2 Control Ethernet Connector.................................................................. B-3 Table B.3 IP Parameters (Control Port)................................................................ B-4 Table B.4 Data Ethernet Connector...................................................................... B-4 Table B.5 IP Parameters (Data Port).................................................................... B-5 Table B.6 Maximum Transcodes .......................................................................... B-6 Table B.7 Video Formats ...................................................................................... B-6 Table B.8 Environmental Conditions .................................................................... B-8 Table B.9 Physical Parameters ............................................................................ B-8 Table B.10 AC Power Supply Specification............................................................ B-9 Table B.11 DC Power Supply Specification.......................................................... B-10 B-2
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Technical Specification
B.1
IP Output Transport Stream
The following parameters are controllable for each IP Output transport stream for
each output port or ports depending on the redundancy mode that is selected.
Table B.1 IP Output Transport Stream
Parameter
Description /
Range
Comment
Source IP Address
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Source IP address
Subnet Mask
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Source Subnet address
Source UDP Port
0 to 65535
Source IP Port Number
Destination IP Address
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Destination IP address
Destination UDP Port
0 to 65535
Destination IP Port Number
Time To Live
0 to 240
TTL value for inclusion in the IP header
Type Of Service
0 to 255
ToS value for inclusion in the IP header
B.2
Control Ethernet Specification
B.2.1
Overview
The system has two Ethernet control ports that support IEEE 802.3 100BaseTX and
1000BaseT Ethernet protocols. The Control ports are accessible via RJ-45
connectors on the rear panel of the chassis and support IEEE 802.3u autonegotiation and parallel detection. Also, the ports support Auto-MDIX.
Table B.2 Control Ethernet Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
RJ-45 (100/1000BaseT)
Connector designation
Ctrl 1/2
Pin outs
Pin 1 - Rx/Tx A(+)
(Unused pins are not
connected)
Pin 2 - Rx/Tx A (-)
Pin 3 - Rx/Tx B (+)
Pin 4 - Rx/Tx C (+)
Pin 5 - Rx/Tx C (-)
Pin 6 - Rx/Tx B (-)
Pin 7 - Rx/Tx D (+)
Pin 8 - Rx/Tx D (-)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
B-3
Technical Specification
B.2.2
IP Parameters
It is possible to configure the following IP parameters for the Control Port.
Table B.3 IP Parameters (Control Port)
Parameter
Specification
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
Network Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
Gateway Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
Note:
B.2.3
The front panel always provides a way of changing these settings to prevent
all control interfaces being disabled.
MAC Address
The MAC address of each Ethernet Control port can be assigned via the Static
Parameters table.
B.3
Data Ethernet Specification
B.3.1
Overview
The Ethernet Data ports support IEEE 802.3u auto-negotiation and parallel
detection. The auto-negotiation function can be disabled to force the line speed to
be either 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps.
These ports support Auto-MDIX. This function can be disabled
Table B.4 Data Ethernet Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
RJ-45 (100/1000BaseT)
Connector designation
Ge 1/2
Pin outs
Pin 1 - Rx/Tx A(+)
(Unused pins are not
connected)
Pin 2 - Rx/Tx A (-)
Ge 3/4
Pin 3 - Rx/Tx B (+)
Pin 4 - Rx/Tx C (+)
Pin 5 - Rx/Tx C (-)
Pin 6 - Rx/Tx B (-)
Pin 7 - Rx/Tx D (+)
Pin 8 - Rx/Tx D (-)
B-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Technical Specification
B.3.2
Data Port Parameters
The transport streams output, via the IP Outputs, contains 188 byte long transport
stream packets.
The time that a port has had a link established is recorded to an accuracy of ± 1
second, and the information made available to the user.
The Ethernet Data Ports always respond to ICMP Echo requests to any source IP
address assigned to an output transport stream currently being transmitted on that
port.
The Ethernet Data Ports respond to all ARP requests
There is hardware filtering of received packets (i.e. a hardware ‘firewall’) to protect
the ports from malicious interference.
B.3.3
IP Parameters
It is possible to configure the following IP parameters for the Data Port.
Table B.5 IP Parameters (Data Port)
Parameter
Specification
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
Network Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
Gateway Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
The default values for source IP address, subnet mask are those assigned to the
ethernet port, or in the case of mirrored mode, those assigned to the primary IP port.
B.3.4
MAC Address
The MAC address of each Ethernet Control port can be assigned via the Static
Parameters table. It is not possible to set the MAC addresses of each of the
Ethernet Data ports to the same value.
B.4
Media Processing Module (SPR/HWO/MPM1)
B.4.1
Overview
The Media Processing Module (MPM) is a single slot solution which can transcode
multiple MPEG-2 and/or H.264 video streams, at both SD and HD resolutions. Audio
passthrough and transcode functionality is also supported.
The total maximum number of transcodes per module is related to the resolution.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
B-5
Technical Specification
At SD resolution, each MPM1 can perform 12 simultaneous transcodes.
Each transcode involving a HD-resolution stream on input and/or output reduces the
number of possible SD transcodes by 3.
Table B.6 Maximum Transcodes
Maximum number of
SD-to-SD transcodes
B.4.2
Maximum number of
HD transcodes
12
0
9
1
6
2
3
3
0
4
Video Formats
Table B.7 Video Formats
Item
Specification
Profiles supported
MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) Main Profile @ Level 3 to Level 4.1
(0.500 to 12.5 Mbps)
MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) High Profile @ Level 4.0 to Level 4.1
(1.000 to 20.0 Mbps)
MPEG-2 MP@ML Video (1.000 to 15.0 Mbps)
MPEG-2 MP@HL Video (2.000 to 30.0 Mbps)
SD resolutions supported
720 x 576 @ 25 Hz
704 x 576 @ 25 Hz
640 x 576 @ 25 Hz
544 x 576 @ 25 Hz
528 x 576 @ 25 Hz
480 x 576 @ 25 Hz
352 x 576 @ 25 Hz
720 x 480 @ 29.97 Hz
704 x 480 @ 29.97 Hz
640 x 480 @ 29.97 Hz
544 x 480 @ 29.97 Hz
528 x 480 @ 29.97 Hz
480 x 480 @ 29.97 Hz
352 x 480 @ 29.97 Hz
HD resolutions supported
1280 x 720 @ 50 Hz
960 x 720 @ 50 Hz
1920 x 1080 @ 25 Hz
B-6
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Technical Specification
Item
Specification
1440 x 1080 @ 25 Hz
1280 x 1080 @ 25 Hz
1280 x 720 @ 59.94 Hz
960 x 720 @ 59.94 Hz
1920 x 1080 @ 29.97 Hz
1440 x 1080 @ 29.97 Hz
1280 x 1080 @ 29.97 Hz
1920 x 1080 @ 23.976 Hz
Video PIP formats
MSTV
128 x 96 @ 25 Hz
128 x 96 @ 29.97 Hz
96 x 96 @ 25 Hz
96 x 96 @ 29.97 Hz
non-MSTV
192 x 192 @ 25 Hz
192 x 192 @ 29.97 Hz
144 x 144 @ 25 Hz
144 x 144 @ 29.97 Hz
Audio formats
Supported audio decoding and encoding modes:
- MPEG-1 Layer II (32 kbps to 384 kbps)
- MPEG-2 Layer II (32 kbps to 384 kbps)
- Dolby Digital 2.0, 5.1 (56 kbps to 640 kbps)
- MPEG-4 AAC/AAC-LC/HE-AAC (16-256kbps)
Audio transcoding
The MPM supports transcoding between any of the
supported formats.
The maximum number of simultaneous transcodes per card
is summarized in Chapter 6, Stream Processing &
Networking.
VBI pass-through
In addition to Audio and Video Transcoding, data may be
passed through from Input to Output. Typically, this can
include :
Generic VANC carriage (SMPTE 2038)
VBI in PID
Teletext
DVB Subtitles
AFD
SCTE 35 splice-point
pass-through
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
The MPM supports SCTE 35 pass-through. SCTE 35 may
be added to any output stream by dragging the component
to the appropriate stream in the Services Configuration
page. The video will have the appropriate splice-points reinserted at the right points on transcode.
B-7
Technical Specification
B.5
Environmental
B.5.1
Conditions
Table B.8 Environmental Conditions
Operational
Specification
Temperature
–10ºC to +50ºC (14ºF to 122ºF) ambient with free air-flow. It may
require a 10 minute warm-up period before all clocks are within
specification if the ambient temperature is less than 0ºC
Humidity
0% to 95% (non-condensing)
Cooling requirements
Cool air input from left side of unit, exhaust from right side of unit.
Handling movement
Fixed (non-mobile) use only
Transportation (Packaged)
Temperature
-40C to +70C (-40F to +158F)
Humidity
0% to 95% (non-condensing)
Storage
Temperature
-25C to +70C (-13F to +158F)
Humidity
0% to 95% (non-condensing)
The product requires no special handling or packaging other than normal
procedures for Ericsson equipment and is suitable for lifting by one person.
B.5.2
Physical
Table B.9 Physical Parameters
B-8
Parameter
Specification
Height
44.5 mm chassis
Width
442.5 mm (excluding rack fixing brackets)
482.6 mm (including rack fixing brackets)
Depth
550 mm (excluding rear connector clearance)
Rack mounting
standard
1U x 19-inch (1U  44.45 mm)
Weight
7.5 kg (16.5 lbs)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Technical Specification
B.6
Power Supply
B.6.1
AC Mains Input
This equipment is fitted with a wide-ranging power supply. It is suitable for supply
voltages of 100-240 V AC -10% +6% at 50/60 Hz nominal.
Table B.10 AC Power Supply Specification
Item
Specification
Power distribution system
Type TN ONLY (EN 60950-1 Annex V): Power distribution
system which is directly earthed, the parts of the equipment
required to be earthed being connected by protective
earthing conductors. This equipment must NOT be used
with single-phase three-wire and PE, TT or IT Type Power
distribution systems.
Connection to supply
Pluggable Equipment Type A (EN 60950-1 para 1.2.5):
Equipment which is intended for connection to the building
power supply wiring via a non-industrial plug and
socket-outlet or a non-industrial appliance Coupler or both.
Correct mains polarity must always be observed. Do not
use reversible plugs with this equipment.
Class of equipment
Class I Equipment (EN 60950-1 para 1.2.4): electric shock
protection by basic insulation and protective earth.
Rated voltage
100-240 V AC (single phase)
Voltage selection
Wide-ranging
Rated frequency
50-60 Hz
Operating Frequency
48-63 Hz
Rated current
4.0 – 2.0 A
Input connector
CEE 22/IEC 3-pin male receptacle
Fuse
Fuse in live conductor in power input filter at rear of unit. Do
not use reversible plugs with this equipment.
Fuse type
Bussmann S505
Littelfuse 215
5x20 mm time delay (T) 1500 A breaking capacity (HBC)
IEC/EN 60127-2 Sheet 5
Fuse current rating
5 A 250 V T HBC
Power consumption
40 – 350 W (depending on options fitted)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
B-9
Technical Specification
B.6.2
DC Input
This equipment is suitable for voltages of -40 V to -60 V. Correct polarity must be
observed.
Table B.11 DC Power Supply Specification
Item
Specification
Rated voltage
For Connection to -48 V supplies only.
(PSU input tolerance -40 V DC to -60 V DC). Correct
polarity must always be observed.
Rated current
9 A.
DC input connector details
For connection to the 48 V input connector, the following
parts from AMP or Molex should be used:
AMP Universal MATE-N-LOK
Housing: AMP no. 1-480700-0
Female terminal (3 per housing): AMP no. 926901-1
Molex MLX
Housing: Molex no. 50-84-1030
Female terminal (3 per housing): Molex no. 02-08-1002.
Power consumption
B.7
Compliance
B.7.1
Safety
40 W – 350 W (depending on options fitted).
1
This equipment has been designed and tested to meet the requirements of the
following:
1
EN 60950-1
European
Information technology equipment - Safety.
IEC 60950-1
International
Information technology equipment - Safety.
UL 60950-1
USA
Information technology equipment - Safety.
The version of the standards shown is that applicable at the time of manufacture.
B-10
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Technical Specification
B.7.2
EMC 2
The equipment has been designed and tested to meet the following:
B.7.3
EN 55022
and
CISPR22
European
EN 61000-3-2 3
European
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Part 3
Limits; Section 2. Limits for harmonic current
emissions (equipment input current  16 A
per phase).
EN 61000-3-33
European
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Part 3.
Limits; Section 3. Limitation of voltage
fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply
systems for equipment with rated current 
16 A.
EN 55024
European
Information technology equipment - Immunity
characteristics - Limits and methods of
measurement.
FCC
USA
Conducted and radiated emission limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to the Code
of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title
47-Telecommunications, Part 15: Radio
frequency devices, subpart B - Unintentional
Radiators.
International
Emission Standard
Limits and methods of measurement of radio
frequency interference characteristics of
information technology equipment - Class A.
Telecommunications
If certain Option Modules (telecom interfaces) are fitted, this equipment comes
within the scope of the RTTE Directive, 1999/5/EC. Compliance with the applicable
essential requirements of this Directive (safety and EMC) are met by conformance
with the safety and EMC standards listed above.
B.7.4
CE Marking
The CE mark is affixed to indicate compliance with the following directives:
Low Voltage Directive (LVD): Directive 2006/95/EC of 12 December 2006 on the
harmonization of the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment
designed for use within certain voltage limits.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive: Directive 2004/108/EC of 15
December 2004 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating
2
3
The EMC tests were performed with the Technical Earth attached, and configured using recommended cables).
Applies only to models of the Product using AC power sources.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
B-11
Technical Specification
to electromagnetic compatibility
Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (RTTE):
Directive 1999/5/EC of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity. (If fitted with telecom type interface modules).
RoHS Directive: Directive 2011/65/EU of 8 June 2011 on the restriction of the
use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment
REACH Directive: Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament
and of the Council of 18 December 2006 concerning the Registration,
Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH), establishing a
European Chemicals Agency, amending Directive 1999/45/EC and repealing
Council Regulation (EEC) No 793/93 and Commission Regulation (EC)
No 1488/94 as well as Council Directive 76/769/EEC and Commission
Directives 91/155/EEC, 93/67/EEC, 93/105/EC and 2000/21/EC
Packaging and Packaging Waste Directive: Directive 2005/20/EC of 9 March
2005 amending Directive 94/62/EC on packaging and packaging waste
WEEE Directive: This directive is outside the scope of CE marking. Ericsson
Television does comply with this directive.
Note:
B.7.5
The CE mark was first affixed to this product in 2012.
C-Tick Mark
The C-Tick mark is affixed to denote compliance with the Australian
Radiocommunications (Compliance and Labelling – Incidental Emissions) Notice
made under s.182 of Radiocommunications Act 1992.
Note:
B.7.6
The C-Tick mark was first affixed to this product in 2012.
Packaging Statement
The Stratocell  or Ethafoam 220  polyethylene foam inserts can be easily
recycled with other low density polyethylene (LDPE) materials.
B.7.7
Packaging Markings
The symbols printed on the outer carton are described below:
Handle with care.
This way up.
B-12
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Technical Specification
Fragile.
Protect from moisture.
See B.7.4 for compliance with directives details.
See B.7.5 for compliance details.
Defines country of origin.
The packaging is reusable per GB 18455-2001.
This symbol guarantees that packaging with this symbol is
recyclable and will be accepted by cardboard recyclers.
Recyclable per GB 18455-2001.
B.7.8
Materials Declarations
Ericsson’s products are designed and manufactured in keeping with good
environmental practise. Our component and materials selection policy prohibits the
use of a range of potentially hazardous materials. In addition, we comply with
relevant environmental legislation.
B.7.8.1
For the European Union
For products sold into the EU after 1st July 2006, we comply with the EU RoHS
Directive. We also comply with the WEEE Directive.
B.7.8.2
For China
For product sold into China after 1st March 2007, we comply with the “Administrative
Measure on the Control of Pollution by Electronic Information Products”. In the first
stage of this legislation, content of six hazardous materials has to be declared
together with a statement of the “Environmentally Friendly Use Period (EFUP)”: the
time the product can be used in normal service life without leaking the hazardous
materials. Ericsson expects the normal use environment to be in an equipment room
at controlled temperatures (around 22°C) with moderate humidity (around 60%) and
clean air, near sea level, not subject to vibration or shock.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
B-13
Technical Specification
Where an Ericsson product contains potentially hazardous materials, this is
indicated on the product by the appropriate symbol containing the EFUP. For
Ericsson products, the hazardous material content is limited to lead (Pb) in some
solders. This is extremely stable in normal use and the EFUP is taken as 50 years,
by comparison with the EFUP given for Digital Exchange/Switching Platform in
equipment in Appendix A of “General Rule of Environment-Friendly Use Period of
Electronic Information Products”. This is indicated by the product marking:
50
It is assumed that while the product is in normal use, any batteries associated with
real-time clocks or battery-backed RAM will be replaced at the regular intervals.
The EFUP relates only to the environmental impact of the product in normal use, it
does not imply that the product will continue to be supported for 50 years.
B.7.9
Equipment Disposal
B.7.9.1
General
Dispose of this equipment safely at the end of its life. Local codes and/or
environmental restrictions may affect its disposal. Regulations, policies and/or
environmental restrictions differ throughout the world. Contact your local jurisdiction
or local authority for specific advice on disposal.
B.7.9.2
For the European Union
"This product is subject to the EU Directive 2002/96/EC on
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) and
should not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste."
B.7.10
Lithium Batteries
The equipment uses the Dallas Semiconductor NVRAM DS1746WP which contains
a Dallas DS9034PCX Power Cap Lithium battery. This cell is not a USA
Environmental Protection Agency listed hazardous waste. It is fully encapsulated
and should not be tampered with.
B-14
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Technical Specification
B.7.11
Recycling
Ericsson Recycling has a process facility that enables customers to return Old and
End-of-Life Products for recycling if it is required.
Ericsson provides assistance to customers and recyclers through our Ericsson
Recycling Business Portal.
This can be reached at: https://ebusiness.ericsson.net/.
To gain access to the Recycling site, you must be set up with a unique login and
password.
To request the login, please contact tvtechpubs@ericsson.com, and include the
information below:

First/Last name

Password request (6 numbers/characters). If you do not include this information
one will be created for you.

Phone

Location (Country)

Company

Work Area (select one of the below)
-
Executive Management
-
Marketing and Sales
-
Planning/Engineering
-
Procurement/Supply
-
Project & Programme
-
Implementation
-
Operations and Maintenance
-
R&D
-
Other
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
B-15
Technical Specification
BLANK
B-16
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
C
Audio Coding Standards
Annex C
Contents
C.1 C.1.1 C.1.2 C.1.3 C.1.4 C.1.5 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
A Brief Introduction to Audio Coding Standards .................................. C-3 MPEG .................................................................................................. C-3 MPEG-1 Layer I/II................................................................................ C-3 Dolby Digital ........................................................................................ C-3 SMPTE 302M: Mapping of AES3 Data into an MPEG-2 Transport
Stream ................................................................................................. C-4 Dolby E ................................................................................................ C-4 C-1
Audio Coding Standards
BLANK
C-2
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Audio Coding Standards
C.1
A Brief Introduction to Audio Coding Standards
Where appropriate, the output Transport Stream can be made compliant with ATSC
A53(E) ATSC Digital Television Standard and DVB 101-154 v1.7.7.
C.1.1
MPEG
The Moving Pictures Experts Group (MPEG) was formed in 1988 to generate
compression techniques for audio and video. In the first version, ISO/IEC 11172-3
MPEG-1 audio, has a selection of two separate algorithms. MPEG-1 Layer I and II
were implementations of the MUSICAM algorithm and MPEG-1 Layer III (mp3) was
an implementation of the ASPEC algorithm. The algorithms have since been
improved and extended with other versions of MPEG.
C.1.2
MPEG-1 Layer I/II
This algorithm is similar to MUSICAM and only really differs in the structure of the
frame headers. Layer I is a restricted version of the full algorithm to allow a reduced
decoder to be developed. Hence, over time as the processing power of decoders
have increased by orders of magnitude, Layer I is no longer used for broadcast.
The algorithm creates 3 frames of 384 samples. Each small frame is divided into
sub-bands and these sub-bands can be coded for each frame or for all 3. There is
limited ability to allocate bits to different bands and there is no entropy coding of the
encoded samples so a relatively high bit rate is required to obtain a reasonable
quality.
C.1.3
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is an algorithm from Dolby that forms part of both the ATSC and DVB
standard for digital broadcasting. It is marketed under the name of Dolby Digital.
The encoder includes a psychoacoustic model to improve the quality. The signal is
divided into 32 multiple sub-bands, which correspond to the critical bands of the
human ear. The number of bits is fixed for each sub-band but there are additional
bits that can be allocated to any sub-band where encoding quality has suffered.
Dolby recommends stereo signals may be coded at 192 kbps, and 5.1 at 448 kbps
but other rates can be used if required.
The encoders have the ability to encode stereo and equivalent modes, and will also
pass through pre-compressed Dolby Digital (both stereo and multi-channel).
When in Dolby Digital Pass-through mode, glitch suppression is supported, where
the coding module monitors the encoded bitstream and if the framing structure is
incorrect, a valid silence frame or the last good frame is inserted in its place. If this
state occurs for more than a second, the encoder signals that the Dolby Digital
bitstream is corrupted.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
C-3
Audio Coding Standards
C.1.4
SMPTE 302M: Mapping of AES3 Data into an MPEG-2 Transport Stream
Though not specifically a coding standard, this does define a method of carrying
AES3 uncompressed audio streams in an MPEG-2 transport stream. The AES
stream can contain non-audio data as well as uncompressed audio. This
mechanism can be used to carry Linear PCM audio, or Dolby E data.
C.1.5
Dolby E
Dolby E was developed by Dolby Laboratories. It allows up to 8 channels of Dolby E
compressed audio to be distributed over an existing 2 channel digital infrastructure.
The compression applied is less than that for consumer codecs (i.e. Dolby Digital),
so is better quality and the audio can be decompressed and re-compressed several
times. The Dolby E stream can also include metadata and timecode.
Dolby E frame duration is either equal to or double the duration of a video frame. For
interlaced formats the duration matches a video frame, but is double the frame
duration for progressive formats. This facilitates easier editing of video and audio in
the digital domain. Dolby E frames are generally aligned to video frames.
C-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
D Dolby Metadata Presets
Annex D
Contents
D.1
Dolby Metadata Presets ...................................................................... D-3
List of Tables
Table D.1 Preset Parameters............................................................................... D-3
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
D-1
Dolby Metadata Presets
BLANK
D-2
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Dolby Metadata Presets
D.1
Dolby Metadata Presets
Eight Dolby Metadata Presets can be configured.
By default, presets 1 - 4 have the same configuration recommended by Ericsson.
Presets 5 - 8 are by default configured to the Dolby defaults for Stereo Film, Stereo
Music, Surround Film and Surround Music respectively.
To configure the presets, please navigate through the GUI as follows :
System Tab > Slots > Slot 1 > Audio Module > Dolby Metadata Presets
Then select the desired preset number.
The following table lists the alarm and failure identifiers generated within the MPM1
Transcoder Card.
Note:
Navigating away from the main Services Configuration page will lose any
changes that have not yet been saved/applied.
All of the parameters in the presets can be changed to the user’s requirements. Any
of these presets can then be applied to any audio channel encoding audio in the
Dolby Digital format. Table D.1 lists the parameters for each preset.
Table D.1 Preset Parameters
Selected Option
Description
Preset name
Name of the preset (for user information)
Dialogue normalization level
Used by a decoder to determine the level of adjustment required to
achieve this set level.
Bitstream mode
Flags the type of service in the bitstream.
Line mode compression profile
Alters the dynamic range for line output.
RF mode compression profile
This alters the dynamic range for RF output. The overall level is
raised by 11 dB.
Center mix level
Indicates the downmix level when there is no centre speaker. This is
applied to left and right channels only.
Surround mix level
Surround downmix level for the front left and right channels when
consumer has no surround speakers.
Dolby Surround mode
Flags if a two channel encoded stream contains information for a
Dolby Pro-logic decode (Lt/Rt)
Audio production information exists
This indicates whether the Mixing Level and Room Type parameters
exist within the bitstream.
Mixing level
Indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialogue level
during the final audio mixing session.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
D-3
Dolby Metadata Presets
Selected Option
Description
Room type
Type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final audio
mixing session.
Copyright flag
Indicates if the material is copyright protected
Original bitstream flag
Indicates if source is the original or a copy
Enable extended bitstream
information
Flags if additional information is available for downmixing.
Preferred downmix mode
Indicates if the producer would prefer a Lt/Rt or a Lo/Ro downmix.
Can be over-ridden by the decoder.
Lt/Rt center mix level
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when
mixed with the L& R channels for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to 'Center
mix level'.
Lt/Rt surround mix level
Indicates the required level reduction of the surround channels when
mixed for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to Surround mix level'.
Lo/Ro center mix level
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when
mixed with the L& R channels for a Lo/Ro downmix. When present
this replaces the value set for the 'Center mix level'
Lo/Ro surround mix level
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when
mixed for Lo/Ro downmix. When present this replaces the value set
for the 'Surround mix level'.
Dolby Surround EX mode
Flags if the stream has been encoded in 'Surround Ex'. Only used if
surround channels are present.
A/D converter type
Indicates type of A/D conversion used.
Digital de-emphasis
To meet the Dolby Digital encoding algorithm specification the audio
must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input signal does have
pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis filter must be applied prior to
encoding.
DC high pass filter enable
Removing the DC component can lead to more efficient encoding,
but there is a risk that signals that do not reach 100% PCM may
exceed this after filtering and therefore must be clipped.
Bandwidth low-pass filter enable
Remove high frequency signals before encoding. The filter removes
frequencies that would not normally be encoded.
Low-frequency effects low pass filter
enable
Apply a 120 Hz low pass filter prior to an encode. Should only be
switched off if it is known that there are no frequencies above 120 Hz.
Surround attenuation enable
Attenuate surround channels by 3 dB before encoding. Theatrical and
consumer mixing rooms use different levels for the surround
channels, and this can be used to compensate.
Surround phase shift enable
Apply a phase shift of 90 degrees to the surround channels. This
simplifies the decode process for producing a 'Lt/Rt' downmix.
D-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
E Alarm Lists
Annex E
Contents
E.1 Alarms ..................................................................................................E-3 List of Tables
Table E.1 Alarm and Failure Identifiers.................................................................E-3 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
E-1
Alarm Lists
BLANK
E-2
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Alarm Lists
E.1
Alarms
The following table lists the alarm and failure identifiers generated within the
SPR1100.
Table E.1 Alarm and Failure Identifiers
Name
ID (Hex)
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
Failure to take action
may cause permanent
damage to the unit.
Please check the fans
are working correctly,
and that the ambient
temperature is not
excessive.
Module
Minor
No effect on operation, but
sort out the reason for
warning.
Failure to take action
may cause permanent
damage to the unit.
Please switch off and
refer to Customer
Support.
Module
Critical
No effect on operation, but
if no action taken, complete
failure could occur.
Invalid
Parameter
Invalid Parameter
received by the
Video/Audio Module.
Module
Critical
Depending on Parameter,
could have a service
impact.
Video/Audio
Module Error
Video/Audio Module
Error. Please see Video
Encoder status for a
more detailed
description of the error.
Module
Critical
Depending on Error, could
have a service impact.
Power On Self
Test Failure
At least one start-up test
has failed. Problems
may be experienced
with the normal
operation of the unit.
Module
Critical
Depending on failure, could
have a service impact.
Over
Temperature
Warning
Over
Temperature
000C0002
Internal HW
Information
000C0007
HW reported an
unexpected status
value. This does not
effect normal operation
of the unit.
Module
Minor
No effect on operation, but
sort out the reason for
error.
Option Card
Build Version
Mismatch
000C0008
The software on this
option card is not an
officially released
version.
Module
Minor
Unit may operate correctly
but has an invalid build in.
Should be replaced with a
valid build as soon as
possible (unless a debug
build).
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
E-3
Alarm Lists
Name
ID (Hex)
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
Video
Processor
Boot Failure
000C0100
At least one video
processor has not
booted.
Video
Module
Critical
Operational problem on
particular service possible
with no output. Possibly
HW issue. Should try
swapping cards.
Video
Processor
Alive Count
Failure
000C0101
At least one video
processor has not
incremented its alive
count.
Video
Module
Major
Usually processor has reset
due incoming
corruption/discontinuity. Brief
interruption.
Reflex
Operation
Compromised
000C0102
Unexpected scenario.
Some video
components will be
stuck at a low bit rate.
Module
Major
This should not happen in
normal operation. Unit
should be rebooted to
recover. If the alarm
persists, contact Customer
Support.
Video (n) Input
Lock
000C0111
No valid video found on
video input.
Video
Module
Major
Service is affected – the
unit cannot find any valid
video or has corrupted
video. However certain
corruption may allow some
video to be decoded.
Unexpected video input
format detected
Video
Module
Major
Service affected – wrong
video format detected
compared to configuration
for this service.
Too many CC errors or
bad packets.
Video
Module
Major
Possibly service affected –
depending on the
frequency of the errors –
may have interrupted video.
No or bad PCR detected
in input.
Video
Module
Major
Possibly service affected –
depending on the
frequency of the errors –
may have interrupted video.
No or bad SCTE35
splice pkt stream.
Video
Module
major
No effect on video – error
on SCTE35 stream.
Requested decode
encode combination not
supported.
Video
Module
Major
No output and this service.
The audio module
reported an unexpected
status value.
Audio
Module
Minor
Should have no effect on
service. Should recover. If
persists contact customer
service.
000C01C1
Video (n) Input
Mismatch
000C0112
000C01C2
Video (n) Input
Quality
000C0114
000C01C3
Video (n) Input
PCR
000C0114
000C01C4
Video (n)
SCTE35
000C0115
000C01C5
Video (n)
Conversion
000C0116
000C01C6
Audio Module
Error
E-4
000C0300
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Alarm Lists
Name
ID (Hex)
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
Audio Module
CPU loading
000C0301
The audio module CPU
load is too high to
support the current
audio configuration.
Audio
Module
Major
Will not start audio services
as configuration is
incorrect.
Audio DSP
Failed to Boot
000C0302
The audio DSP has
failed to boot.
Audio
Module
Major
Audio Services will not start
and audio will fail.
Option Card
Build Version
Mismatch
The software on this
option card is not an
officially released
version.
Module
Minor
Unit may operate correctly
but has an invalid build in.
Should be replaced with a
valid build as soon as
possible (unless a debug
build).
Video
Processor
Boot Failure
At least one video
processor has not
booted.
Video
Module
Critical
Operational problem on
particular service possible
with no output. Possibly
HW issue. Should try
swapping cards.
Video
Processor
Alive Count
Failure
At least one video
processor has not
incremented its alive
count.
Video
Module
Major
Usually processor has reset
due incoming
corruption/discontinuity. Brief
interruption.
Video (n) Input
Lock
No valid video found on
video input.
Video
Module
Major
Service is affected – the
unit cannot find any valid
video or has corrupted
video. However, certain
corruption may allow some
video to be decoded.
Video (n) Input
Mismatch
Unexpected video input
format detected.
Video
Module
Major
Service affected – wrong
video format detected
compared to configuration
for this service.
Video (n) Input
Quality
Too many CC errors or
bad packets.
Video
Module
Major
Possibly service affected –
depending on the
frequency of the errors –
may have interrupted video.
Video (n) Input
PCR
No or bad PCR detected
in input.
Video
Module
Major
Possibly service affected –
depending on the
frequency of the errors –
may have interrupted video.
Video (n)
SCTE35
No or bad SCTE35
splice pkt stream.
Video
Module
major
No effect on video – error
on SCTE35 stream.
Video (n)
Conversion
Requested decode
encode combination not
supported
Video
Module
Major
No output and this service.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
E-5
Alarm Lists
Name
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
Audio Module
Error
The audio module
reported an unexpected
status value.
Audio
Module
Minor
Should have no effect on
service. Should recover. If
persists contact customer
service.
Audio Module
CPU loading
The audio module CPU
load is too high to
support the current
audio configuration.
Audio
Module
Major
Will not start audio services
as configuration is
incorrect.
Audio DSP
Failed to Boot
The audio DSP has
failed to boot.
Audio
Module
Major
Audio Services will not start
and audio will fail.
No valid audio detected
on selected input.
Please check source
connection.
Audio
Module
Major
Service will fail because it
cannot find any valid audio
or has corrupted audio.
However, certain corruption
may allow some audio to
be decoded.
Incoming transport
stream error. Please
check source TS.
Audio
Module
Major
Service is usually affected
because it has Transport
Stream corruption.
However, certain corruption
may allow some audio to
be decoded.
Compressed audio not
detected on input.
Please check source
connection and source
format.
Audio
Module
Minor
Service is affected –
Compressed audio format
not detected in input.
Please check source.
CRC error in
compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
Audio
Module
Minor
Service is affected –
Compressed audio format
not correct. Please check
source.
Unsupported sample
rate at decoder output
Audio
Module
Minor
Service is affected –
Compressed audio format
not correct. Please check
source.
Ethernet interface Ctrl 1
link down on Control
network.
Base
Unit
Major
No service effect – but loss
of control of unit through
this interface.
Ethernet interface Ctrl 1
on Control network:
duplicate IP detected.
Base
Unit
Major
No service effect – but
corruption/intermittent
control of box through this
interface.
Audio (n) Input
lock
ID (Hex)
000C0311
000C0481
Audio (n) TS
input error
000C0312
000C0482
Audio (n)
Compressed
audio not
detected
000C0313
Audio (n) Input
frame CRC
failure
000C0314
Audio (n)
Unsupported
sample rate
000C0315
Ethernet
interface Ctrl 1
link down on
Control
network
00000401
Ethernet
interface Ctrl 1
on Control
network:
duplicate IP
detected
E-6
000C0483
000C0484
000C0485
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Alarm Lists
Name
ID (Hex)
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
Ethernet
interface Ctrl 2
link down on
Control
network
00000402
Ethernet interface Ctrl 2
link down on Control
network.
Base
Unit
Major
No service effect – but loss
of control of box through
this interface.
Ethernet
interface Ctrl 2
on Control
network:
duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface Ctrl 2
on Control network:
duplicate IP detected.
Base
Unit
Major
No service effect – but
corruption/intermittent
control of box through this
interface.
Control
Network Lost
Control Network Lost.
Base
Unit
Critical
No service effect – but total
loss of control of box
through all interfaces.
Virtual IP
address on
Control
network:
duplicate IP
detected
Virtual IP address on
Control network:
duplicate IP detected.
Base
Unit
Major
No service effect – but
corruption/intermittent
control of box.
Ethernet
interface
Data 3 link
down in Data
Interface
Group 3-4
Ethernet interface
Data 3 link down in Data
Interface Group 3-4.
Base
Unit
Major
Will affect any service on
this data interface.
Ethernet
interface
Data3 in Data
Interface
Group 3-4:
duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface
Data 3 in Data Interface
Group 3-4: duplicate IP
detected.
Base
Unit
Major
Possible affecting service
on this interface– possible
corruption/intermittent
behavior.
Ethernet
interface
Data 4 link
down in Data
Interface
Group 3-4
Ethernet interface
Data 4 link down in Data
Interface Group 3-4.
Base
Unit
Major
Will affect any service on
this data interface.
Ethernet
interface
Data 4 in Data
Interface
Group 3-4:
duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface
Data 4 in Data Interface
Group 3-4: duplicate IP
detected.
Base
Unit
Major
Possible affecting service
on this interface– possible
corruption/intermittent
behaviour.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
E-7
Alarm Lists
Name
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
Data Interface
Group 3-4:
Data Output
Network Lost
Data Interface Group 34: Data Output Network
Lost.
Base
Unit
Critical
Total loss of data on this
interface.
Virtual IP
address on
Data Interface
Group 3-4:
duplicate IP
detected
Virtual IP address on
Data Interface Group 34: duplicate IP detected.
Base
Unit
Major
Possible affecting service
on this interface– possible
corruption/intermittent
behavior.
Ethernet
interface
Data 1 link
down in Data
Interface
Group 1-2
Ethernet interface
Data 1 link down in Data
Interface Group 1-2.
Base
Unit
Major
Will affect any service on
this data interface.
Ethernet
interface
Data 1 in Data
Interface
Group 1-2:
duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface
Data 1 in Data Interface
Group 1-2: duplicate IP
detected.
Base
Unit
Major
Possible affecting service
on this interface – possible
corruption/intermittent
behavior.
Ethernet
interface
Data 2 link
down in Data
Interface
Group 1-2
Ethernet interface
Data 2 link down in Data
Interface Group 1-2.
Base
Unit
Major
Will affect any service on
this data interface.
Ethernet
interface
Data 2 in Data
Interface
Group 1-2:
duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface
Data 2 in Data Interface
Group 1-2: duplicate IP
detected.
Base
Unit
major
Possible affecting service
on this interface – possible
corruption/intermittent
behavior.
Data Interface
Group 1-2:
Data Input
Network Lost
Data Interface Group 12: Data Input Network
Lost.
Base
Unit
Critical
Total loss of data on this
interface.
Virtual IP
address on
Data Interface
Group 1-2:
duplicate IP
detected
Virtual IP address on
Data Interface Group 12: duplicate IP detected.
Base
Unit
Major
Possible affecting service
on this interface– possible
corruption/intermittent
behavior.
E-8
ID (Hex)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Alarm Lists
Name
ID (Hex)
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
Primary
Ethernet
interface not in
use on Control
Network
Primary Ethernet
interface not in use on
Control Network.
Base
Unit
Major
Should not affect control if
secondary being used.
Primary
Ethernet
interface not in
use on Data
Interface
Group 3-4
Primary Ethernet
interface not in use on
Data Interface Group 34.
Base
Unit
Major
Should not affect data
output if secondary being
used.
Primary
Ethernet
interface not in
use on Data
Interface
Group 1-2
Primary Ethernet
interface not in use on
Data Interface Group 12.
Base
Unit
Major
Should not affect data input
if secondary being used.
IP address not
assigned to
Data 1 in
Interface
Group 1-2
IP address not assigned
to Data1 in Interface
Group 1-2.
Base
Unit
Critical
IP address needs to be
assigned to work correctly.
IP address not
assigned to
Data 2 in
Interface
Group 1-2
IP address not assigned
to Data2 in Interface
Group 1-2.
Base
Unit
Critical
IP address needs to be
assigned to work correctly.
Source IP
address not
set for TS
being output
from Data (n)
No IP address set for
physical port Data (n) or
user source IP address.
Base
Unit
Major
Source address not set for
data interface. This should
be set if source address
required.
Option card
failed to boot
The card did not boot. It
may be faulty.
Base
Unit
Critical
Services on this card will
not work
Option Card
Comms
Failure in slot
An option card failed to
respond to the host.
Base
Unit
Critical
Option card has never or
stopped communication.
Services may continue if
they were going but any
further configuration will
fail.
HW
Configuration
Mismatch in
slot
The option card fitted
does not match that of
the expected
configuration. This alarm
can be cleared by
accepting the config in
the Option Slots menu.
Base
Unit
Critical
Should be a set up issue –
once cleared will not affect
operation.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
E-9
Alarm Lists
Name
ID (Hex)
Unrecognized
Option Card in
slot
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
The id prom of the
option could not be read
correctly.
Base
Unit
Minor
Should not be seen in
service. If seen card should
operate but needs
rectifying.
Referenced
Output Stream
Unavailable
from slot (n)
00000461
An option card is not
installed in the specified
slot or it cannot provide
the requested output
stream.
Base
Unit
Critical
Any services from this slot
will fail.
Fan Failure
00000441
Permanent damage may
be caused by running
the unit whilst the fans
are not working.
Base
Unit
Major
Unit will overheat and fail if
left in this condition for an
extended period.
Failure to take action
may cause permanent
damage to the unit.
Please check the fans
are working correctly,
and that the ambient
temperature is not
excessive.
Base
Unit
Minor
Services will continue but
the over temperature
should be investigated.
Failure to take action
may cause permanent
damage to the unit.
Please switch off and
refer to Customer
Support.
Base
Unit
Critical
Unit has overheated and
will fail if left in this
condition for an extended
period.
Power On Self
Test Failure
At least one start-up test
has failed. Problems
amy be experienced
with the normal
operation of the unit.
Base
Unit
Minor
A start up test has failed.
This may not affect normal
operation, but should be
investigated.
+12 V A Failed
+12 V A rail has failed.
Please check supply or
contact Customer
Support.
Base
Unit
Warning
This may not affect normal
operation, but should be
investigated.
+12 V B Failed
+12 V A rail has failed.
Please check supply or
contact Customer
Support
Base
Unit
Warning
This may not affect normal
operation, but should be
investigated.
The Real-time clock has
failed. The time/date will
not be stored between
power-ups
Base
Unit
Minor
This will not affect
operation but will affect
accurate logging, etc.
Over
Temperature
Warning
Over
Temperature
Real Time
Clock
E-10
00000443
0000044B
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Alarm Lists
Name
ID (Hex)
NTP Server
Response
Timeout
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
The unit could not
contact the NTP Server.
The time/date will drift
over time.
Base
Unit
Warning
Does not affect operation
but date and time could be
wrong with server.
Internal
Hardware
Issue
00000449
An Internal Hardware
Issue has occured. The
system may not function
properly.
Base
Unit
Minor
May not affect normal
operation but should be
investigated.
Host Build
Version
Mismatch
0000044A
Host software is not at
an officially released
version. Host function
may not be affected.
Base
Unit
Minor
Unit may operate correctly
but has an invalid build in.
Should be replaced with a
valid build as soon as
possible (unless a debug
build).
Host Identity
Not
Programmed
0000044E
The host identity could
not be read correctly.
Base
Unit
Major
Unit may operate but has
an internal error and should
be investigated.
Uncontrolled
release
0000044F
This combination of host
and option card software
is not officially
supported. This may
lead to unexpected
behavior.
Base
Unit
Minor
Unit may operate correctly
but has an invalid build in.
Should be replaced with a
valid build as soon as
possible (unless a debug
build).
No identity
license
00000450
This unit has not been
licensed with an identity.
Base
Unit
Critical
Unit may operate but has
an internal error and should
be investigated.
Lost Contact
With Peer
This unit is not able to
contact its redundancy
peer. Check that peer IP
address is correct,
control network
connections are correct
and that peer working
correctly.
Base
Unit
Major
The output should be
maintained by primary
or/and secondary – MGP
will stop dual streaming
Unit
Unavailable
This unit has been
configured to be
Unavailable. This means
it will not take part in the
1 + 1 redundancy group.
Base
unit
Critical
Service will continue but
this is a severe warning
that 1+1 will not operate if
required.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
E-11
Alarm Lists
Name
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
Configuration
Mismatch
The configuration
settings of units in the 1
+ 1 redundancy group
may not match. To clear
this alarm, copy the
configuration settings
from one unit to the
other unit using buttons
on the Standalone 1 +
1 Redundancy
configuration settings to
copy the up-to-date
configuration settings to
the other unit.
Base
Unit
Major
Service will continue but
there is a mismatch in
configuration and the action
listed should be performed.
Redundant
Secondary
Active
The redundant
secondary is active. This
will be eroding the timed
license on the
secondary unit. Repair
the primary and switch
back to it as soon as
possible. To switch back
to the primary use the
button on the
Standalone 1 + 1
Redundancy
configuration settings.
Base
Unit
Major
Service is maintained but
the life of the secondary is
time limited (30 days).
Warnings will be given
before this deadline.
Version
Mismatch
The software version,
hardware configuration
or hardware version of
units in the 1 + 1
redundancy group are
not identical. The
secondary unit will not
be able to act as a
redundant spare. This
alarm will only be raised
on a secondary unit,
even though the
secondary may contain
the desired
configuration.
Base
unit
Major
This should be a set up
alarm and should be
resolved before a service
goes on air.
License Nearly
Expired
The 1 + 1 redundancy
backup license is close
to expiring. If it expires,
the secondary unit will
not be able to act as a
redundant spare.
Contact support to
renew the license.
Base
unit
Critical
Alarm to prompt action that
the secondary is running
out of time.
E-12
ID (Hex)
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Alarm Lists
Name
ID (Hex)
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
License
Expired
The 1 + 1 redundancy
backup license has
expired. The secondary
unit is not able to act as
a redundant spare. The
video data outputs of the
secondary unit have
been disabled. Contact
support to renew the
license.
Base
unit
Critical
The time limit on the
secondary unit has expired
and the services have been
turned off. Renew license
and bring primary unit back
on line.
Redundancy
Parameters
Unavailable
The redundancy
configuration
parameters have not
been configured
correctly (either on this
unit or the peer unit).
Base
Unit
Major
This should be a set up
alarm. The units are not set
up correctly for redundancy
– please check.
Conflicting
Roles
The primary and
secondary Device
Roles are in conflict. For
a valid redundancy
group there must be
exactly 1 unit with
Primary role an 1 unit
with Secondary role.
Check the Device Role
setting on your primary
and secondary units.
Base
unit
Major
This should be a set up
alarm. The units are not set
up correctly for redundancy
– please check.
Conflicting IP
Addresses
The primary and
secondary IP address
configurations are in
conflict. Ensure that the
Peer IP Address setting
on each unit is correctly
configured with the
control IP address of its
peer.
Base
Unit
Major
This should be a set up
alarm. The units are not set
up correctly for redundancy
– please check.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
E-13
Alarm Lists
Name
ID (Hex)
Conflicting
Status
No data
available for
Input
Transport
Stream
00000501
Input
Transport
Stream
running on
Backup
00000511
0000050A
-
Description
Source
Default
Value
Operation Effect
The Primary and
Secondary
Active/Passive status
values are in conflict
and cannot be resolved
automatically. Both units
are either Passive or
Active. This can occur if
power is lost, or the
control connection
between the units fails.
To clear this condition
use the Set Primary
Active or Set
Secondary Active
buttons on the
Standalone 1 + 1
Redundancy
configuration settings.
Base
Unit
Critical
An event has occurred that
probably interrupted service
for a period and now the
units need to be reset to a
know status.
Both Primary and
Backup Input Transport
Streams have failed.
Base
Unit
Critical
The data on both inputs
have failed and will cause a
loss of service.
Primary Input Transport
Stream has failed.
Base
Unit
Warning
A switch has occurred to
back up input. The cause
for this should be
investigated.
Failed to go online,
previous online device
preventing transmission.
Base
Unit
Major
Previous device is still on
line and MGP has stopped
this unit from going on line.
0000051A
MGP Failure
MGP Collision
00000492
Potential duplicate
transmission detected.
Base
Unit
Major
Service should be
maintained but there seems
to be inconsistent
messaging in the system.
Needs to be investigated.
MGP Spurious
00000493
Spurious MSM packet
detected.
Base
Unit
Minor
Service should not be
affected but an unexpected
message appeared. If this
continues it should be
investigated.
Reflex
Operation
Compromised
00000693
Unexpected scenario.
Some video
components will be
stuck at a low bit rate.
Base
Unit
Major
This should not happen in
normal operation. Unit
should be rebooted to
recover. If the alarm
persists, contact Customer
Support.
E-14
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
F Automatic Loudness Control
Annex F
Contents
F.1 F.1.1 F.1.2 F.2 F.2.1 F.2.2 F.2.2.1 F.2.2.2 F.2.2.3 F.2.2.4 F.3 F.4 F.4.1 F.4.2 F.4.3 F.4.4 Overview...............................................................................................F-3 The Challenge Faced Today ................................................................F-3 Corrective Measures ............................................................................F-4 Operation..............................................................................................F-5 Loudness Units.....................................................................................F-5 Configuration ........................................................................................F-6 Basic Configuration ..............................................................................F-6 Advanced Configuration .......................................................................F-7 Menu Settings.......................................................................................F-7 Status Values .......................................................................................F-8 The Audio Pipeline ...............................................................................F-9 Standards Compliance .......................................................................F-10 Measurement......................................................................................F-10 Correction ...........................................................................................F-10 Licensing ............................................................................................F-10 Further Information .............................................................................F-11 List of Figures
Figure F.1 Corrective Measures ............................................................................F-4 Figure F.2 Audio Component > Encode Tab > Automatic Loudness Control ........F-6 Figure F.3 ALC Components .................................................................................F-9 2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
F-1
Automatic Loudness Control
BLANK
F-2
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Automatic Loudness Control
F.1
Overview
This Annex describes the operation of Automatic Loudness Control (ALC) in the
EN81xx encoder version 7.0.100 onwards.
ALC is an audio processing mode for measuring and modifying audio amplitude with
the aim of changing the perceived loudness level. It uses a measurement based
upon the new standards for measuring audio loudness defined in ITU-R BS.1770-2,
this standard forms the measurement basis of the guidelines in EBU R128 and
ATSC/A85.
F.1.1
The Challenge Faced Today
Loudness encompasses two issues:

The first is where the loudness increases when transitioning to an interstitial /
advert. Traditional peak measurement methods do not adequately measure the
perceived loudness of audio and interstitials / ‘adverts’ are often produced to
take advantage of this. This is addressed by the ALC algorithm. This operates
dynamically, responding quickly to sudden increases in loudness and removing
correction quickly once the problem has abated.

The second is the disparity of loudness between different services. This results
in differences in loudness when ‘surfing’ channels and a viewer having to adjust
the volume whenever they change to a new channel. The long term correction
algorithm (LTLC) should measure the audio input level over a longer period and
gradually adjust the level towards the desired loudness level. This operates
gradually to make the correction imperceptible to the listener. Setting all
channels to the same level will bring them into loudness alignment.
Dynamically correcting loudness issues presents a difficulty due to conflicting needs
of maintaining audio quality and making the corrections imperceptible to the listener
while still being effective.
Performing correction in a live environment in a broadcast encoder brings its own
challenges. Most current recommendations/legislation for audio loudness
management describes the measurement of audio loudness in one of two different
methods:

The first method is to measure the loudness over the duration of the program,
where the definition of a program could be a 2 hour film or a 30 second advert.
The loudness of the material is measured over the entire program, this means
that there could be a 30 s period in a film where the audio is very loud (i.e. an
action scene with explosions); however, this could be balanced out across the
entire program and would be perfectly acceptable. With an advert at a similar
loudness this 30 s period has no way of being balanced out and could then
violate loudness regulations / recommendations. This is a problem in live
environments because the loudness for the program cannot be known ahead of
time, similarly in a broadcast encoder it is not known where a program starts and
ends. To be absolutely certain of compliance requires the material to be
measured and adjusted offline prior to broadcast.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
F-3
Automatic Loudness Control

The second method is to sample the average loudness of a channel at regular
intervals and make sure that these lie within the regulated tolerances for
loudness. This is easier in a broadcast / live environment as the start and end
periods of a program do not need to be known. The encoder tries to dynamically
adjust the loudness to keep to the target level. The encoder settings control how
dynamically the encoder responds. This is the method that is adopted by audio
loudness correction systems operating in a live environment.
In a broadcast / live environment there is always going to be a problem of knowing
when to correct an excess of loudness and when it should be allowed because it is
part of a dynamic program which is correctly formatted for the regulations when
measured as a whole.
F.1.2
Corrective Measures
Ericsson’s Automatic Loudness Control has 3 components:
1. Measurement.
2. Short Term Audio Loudness Correction (ALC).
3. Long Term Audio Loudness Correction (LTLC).
Audio
Source
Loudness
Measure
Loudness
Correction
ALC
Peak Level
Limiter
Audio
Encoding
+
LTLC
Figure F.1 Corrective Measures
The Measurement stage measures the loudness of the raw audio prior to encoding
(and if applicable after an input decode stage). The measurement uses the
algorithm defined in ITU-R BS.1770-2. It provides an Integrated Loudness
Measurement; this is a long measurement using data collected since the audio
channel was configured or since the statistics were last reset. It also provides a
short measurement of the loudness of the last three second window. All
measurements are made prior to any corrections and any encode process.
F-4
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Automatic Loudness Control
The short term audio loudness correction is designed to correct spikes in loudness
such as those seen during interstitials / adverts. The response of this algorithm can
be controlled using the three available presets. The short term ALC algorithm will
never apply gain it will only attenuate the input, this is to avoid impairing intentionally
quiet sections of content, something that commonly occurs in movies. The algorithm
takes a measurement of loudness over a very short window and operates quickly to
correct and then remove correction once the problem has gone. If using only short
term ALC mode, for this to operate correctly then the loudness of the incoming audio
needs to be at approximately target level.
The long term audio loudness correction is designed to adjust the long term
loudness of a channel to the target level. This responds dynamically to the input and
the speed of response can be configured by the time period. This setting can be
used in a system to attempt to produce channels with equivalent loudness levels so
when a user is changing channels they do not perceive different loudness levels.
When transcoding, the measurement stage follows the decoding stage for the
incoming audio. All measurements and corrections are made to uncompressed
audio and are therefore independent of the choice of audio coding standards.
It is worth noting that although the measurement of audio loudness is specifically
defined by the standards mentioned in this document the correction is a result of the
interpretation of the specific algorithm. Therefore, two different implementations that
are both ITU-R BS.1770-2 compliant will not necessary produce the same corrective
result. It is therefore advised that if the corrected output is to be referenced to any
regional legislation that the measurement and any subsequent correction is
performed offline rather than on a real-time basis.
F.2
Operation
F.2.1
Loudness Units
LKFS
The ITU has defined a new unit for the measurement of audio loudness based upon
ITU-R BS.1770. This defines the designation LKFS, the unit is a perceptually
weighted measurement relative to full scale. A property of this unit is a relationship
to dBFS such that an increase in the level of a signal by 1 dB will cause an increase
in loudness by 1 LKFS.
LU
The recommendation ITU-R BS.1771 defines the designation LU (Loudness Unit)
which has a one to one correspondence to LKFS.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
F-5
Automatic Loudness Control
F.2.2
Configuration
F.2.2.1
Basic Configuration
Make sure the unit has the required number of ALC licenses, one license is required
per stereo pair or part of (for details see section F.4.3 Licensing). This can be
viewed on the Configuration > Licenses web page.
To configure ALC from the web interface select the card in use for the audio
encoding and then select the appropriate audio module and audio encode instance.
On the audio encode menu select the select the Automatic Loudness Control
menu, see Figure F.2 below.
Figure F.2 Audio Component > Encode Tab > Automatic Loudness Control
1. Configure the operating mode. For short term only corrections select the
Measure + ALC option. For short term corrections and longer term channel
level adjustment select Measure + ALC + LTLC. If using Measure + ALC, then
for correct operation the nominal level of the incoming audio should be
approximately the same as the Target Level.
2. Set the Target Level. This should normally be the regulation prescribed
loudness level. This is the desired loudness level for the long term level
adjustment. The EBU recommendation as found in EBU R128 is -23 LU. The
ATSC recommendation as found in ATSC/A85 is -24 LKFS.
3. Select the Time Period, this is the response time for the adjustments of the
long term level correction. 20 minutes would be a suitable starting value, if the
F-6
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Automatic Loudness Control
changes are too dynamic then increase this number. Remember to leave
enough time after this has been changed for the response to take place as this
could be quite gradual.
4. Leave all the other values on their default settings. If the algorithm is not
correcting advert levels adequately then try changing the preset to strong, if the
effect is too strong on adverts then set the preset to subtle.
See F.2.2.3 Menu Settings for details of each menu item.
F.2.2.2
Advanced Configuration
The ALC algorithm fits in the audio pipeline immediately before the encode
algorithm. When transcoding, the ALC operates after the decode stage.
Section F.3 The Audio Pipeline describes the ALC pipeline in detail and shows the
order in which adjustments are applied.
To begin with, follow section F.2.2.1 Basic Configuration.
The time period controls the response of the long term correction algorithm, the time
period refers to the amount of time taken by the filter to achieve 2/3 of the correction
needed. The speed of the correction is controlled by 2 factors, this is one of them,
this value controls the response curve of the filter as the error between the current
level and the desired level reduces so does the rate of change of correction so as to
avoid overshoot and oscillation. The second factor is an internal rule that prevents
changes occurring too quickly to avoid noticeable changes.
Additional Controls
The Peak Limit is a hard limit (it will clip the signal) on the maximum signal level in
dB; this does not use the loudness measurements. The limiter is after the loudness
measurement and correction.
Maximum Boost and Maximum Attenuation, these control how much adjustment
can be applied by the loudness correction algorithm. This is to prevent over
adjustment which can lead to unwanted audio artifacts.
F.2.2.3
Menu Settings
All the corrections are based upon the measurement compared to the target level
which should be configured to the local regulated loudness level.

Operating Mode - the ALC operating mode:
-
Off - ALC is not in use.
-
Measure - Long and short measurements are taken and displayed in the
status but no audio adjustments are made.
-
Measure + ALC - Measurements are taken and corrections are made for
short term peak in audio that are measured 1 LU above the target level.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
F-7
Automatic Loudness Control
-
Note:
F.2.2.4
F-8
Measure + ALC + LTLC - Measurements are taken and corrections are
made for short term peak in audio that are measured 1 LU above the target
level. Corrections are also made over the longer term to adjust the channel
loudness level to that of the target level.
In this mode manual gain adjustment from the codec page is disabled.

Target Level - The desired loudness level for the channel. This should normally
be set to the level specified by local legislation for the expected audio loudness
level.

Timer Period - This controls the responsiveness of the long term audio
loudness level correction. A smaller number will result in the audio being
adjusted more dynamically. A larger value will give a slower less noticeable
adjustment. If the response is increased then the level will change more
frequently. This can result in reducing the dynamics of the audio material. A
slower response will have less effect on the audio however if the input level
changes then the audio level will take longer to adjust to the target level. This is
a balance between the two factors that needs to be decided upon by the
operator.

Peak Limit - This controls a hard clipping limiter for the audio level. This
adjustment is based on the absolute peak level measured in dBFS. The peak
limiter only operates in Measure + ALC and Measure + ALC + LTLC modes. If
this value is set to 0, no limiting is performed.

Maximum Boost - This control determines the maximum amount of gain that
the LTLC algorithm can apply. This is to prevent over adjustment which can lead
to unwanted audio artifacts.

Maximum Attenuation - This control determines the maximum amount of
attenuation that the ALC and the LTLC algorithm can apply. This is to prevent
over adjustment which can lead to unwanted audio artifacts.

Preset - The available options are Subtle, Standard and Strong. This setting
controls the aggressiveness of the corrections performed by the Short Term
ALC algorithm. It controls how quickly the correction takes place and the
strength of the correction
Status Values

Integrated Loudness - This is the long term measurement that shows the
channel loudness since configuration or the last reset request. After running for
a period of time this could be expected to show little response but will show the
long average loudness for the channel. This displays the input level before
any correction is applied.

Short Term Loudness - This is the short term measurement that shows the
loudness of the channel measured over the last 3 seconds. This displays the
input level before any correction is applied.

Current Adjustment - This is the current correction that the ALC and LTLC
algorithms are applying to the audio. This changes slowly due to the nature of
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Automatic Loudness Control
the web interface. Internally the correction calculations are being performed
every audio frame.

F.3
Reset Statistics - This can be used to reset the statistics that have been
collected in the audio DSP. Due to the slower update nature of the web
interface the apparent change would be to the measurement of the Integrated
Loudness only.
The Audio Pipeline
Figure F.3 shows how the different components of ALC fit together in the audio
pipeline. The figure shows which user interface settings control each block.
Audio
Source
Loudness
Measure
(EBU R128)
Level
Control
Loudness
Correction
Peak Level
Limiter
Audio
Output
Level
Manual
Gain
Operating
Mode
Gate
User Interface
ALC
+
+
+
Target Level
Rate
Limiter
Low Pass
Filter
Max Boost
Max Attn
Time Period
LTLC module
Peak Level
Correction
Clip Alarm
Figure F.3 ALC Components
The pipeline takes, as its source, the raw audio input or output of the decode stage.
The output goes to actual encode library.
The (manual) Level Control stage is disabled when ALC is in operation. The
Loudness Measure block performs a standards-based (EBU R128) measurement
algorithm on the audio signal. The statistics collected here are then passed to the
LTLC module and the ALC module.
The LTLC module uses an over-damped feed-forward control loop.
The LTLC module and the ALC module both calculate the necessary corrections.
The rate limiter in the LTLC module prevents the adjustments from making large
gain/attenuation changes too quickly. The adjustment factors, due to LTLC and
ALC, are then combined and the Loudness Correction block takes in one adjustment
factor so that the audio is manipulated only once.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
F-9
Automatic Loudness Control
The final stage is to pass the audio through a Peak Level Limiter to clip levels that
are too high.
F.4
Standards Compliance
F.4.1
Measurement
The measurements made follow those specified in ITU-R BS.1770-2. This defines
the unit LKFS. The measurement does not perform the True Peak measurement
defined in ITU-R BS.1770-2.
The interface also uses the unit LU which is defined in ITU-R BS.1771.
EBU R128 defines a short loudness measurement which is used as a basis for the
provided Short Term measurement but due to the nature of the web interface the
Short Term value cannot be updated as frequently as that defined in the EBU
recommendation.
ATSC Recommended Practice A/85 Annex A Section 5.1 specifies the use of ITU-R
BS.1770 as a method of measuring audio loudness.
The measurement has been verified against third party measurement equipment
that implement an ITU-R BS.1770-2 measure.
F.4.2
Correction
There is no standard algorithm for correcting audio loudness problems. The
algorithms used in ALC and LTLC are proprietary and copyrighted by Ericsson
Television.
F.4.3
Licensing
ALC is a licensed feature. It requires a license for every encode instance of stereo
or mono.
For multichannel encoding 1 license allows for 2 channels and a license cannot be
split across multiple encode instances.
Examples:
F-10

2.0 (Stereo) requires 1 license.

1.0 (Mono) requires 1 license.

1+1 (Dual Mono) requires 1 license.

2 x 1.0 requires 2 licenses.

5.1 counts as 6 channels and therefore requires 3 licenses.
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Automatic Loudness Control

5.0 counts as 5 channels and therefore requires 3 licenses.
For 2 5.0 services, this requires 2 encode instances and each instance requires 3
licenses. In total 6 licenses.
The ALC license is in addition to any other required audio licenses.
F.4.4
Further Information

Recommendation ITU-R BS 1770-2 ‘Algorithms to measure audio programme
loudness and true-peak audio level’

Recommendation ITU-R BS.1771, ‘Requirements for loudness and true-peak
indicating meters’

EBU Working Group PLOUD http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness

EBU Technical Recommendation R 128 ‘Loudness normalisation and permitted
maximum level of audio signals’

EBU Tech Doc 3341 ‘Loudness Metering: ‘EBU Mode’ metering to supplement
loudness normalisation in accordance with EBU R 128’

EBU Tech Doc 3342 ‘Loudness Range: A measure to supplement loudness
normalisation in accordance with EBU R 128’

EBU Tech Doc 3343 ‘Practical Guidelines for Production and implementation in
accordance with EBU R 128’

EBU Tech Doc 3344 ‘Practical Guidelines for Distribution of Programmes in
accordance with EBU R 128’

ATSC Recommended Practice: ‘Techniques for Establishing and Maintaining

Audio Loudness for Digital Television Document’ A/85:2011, 25 July 2011
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
F-11
Automatic Loudness Control
BLANK
F-12
2/1553-FGC 101 1400 Uen B
Download PDF